2000966-387a Dash 3 - 4 - 5K Versao 6.5 Service

GE Healthcare
Dash 3000/4000/5000
Patient Monitor
Service Manual
Software Version 6.5 or later
Dash 3000/4000/5000
English
2023909-008 (CD)
2023896-072A (paper)
2007 General Electric Company
All Rights Reserved
T-2 Dash 3000/4000/5000 2000966-387A
10 April 2007
NOTE: The i nformati on i n thi s manual onl y appl i es to Dash 3000/4000/5000 pati ent moni tors wi th software
versi on 6.5 or l ater. I t does not appl y to earl i er software versi ons. Due to conti nui ng product i nnovati on,
speci fi cati ons i n thi s manual are subject to change wi thout noti ce.
NOTE: The assembl y drawi ngs i n thi s manual onl y support pati ent moni tors wi th the SD0 product code.
Pati ent moni tors wi th the SD0 product code are onl y compati bl e wi th software versi on 6.5 or l ater.
NOTE: For techni cal documentati on purposes, the abbrevi ati on GE i s used for the l egal enti ty name, GE
Medi cal Systems I nformation Technologies.
Li sted bel ow are GE Medi cal Systems I nformation Technologies trademarks. Al l other trademarks contai ned
herei n are the property of thei r respecti ve owners.
DASH, DI NAMAP, EAGLE, MULTI -LI NK, MUSE, SAM, SOLAR, TRI M KNOB, and UNI TY NETWORK are
trademarks of GE Medi cal Systems I nformation Technologies regi stered i n the Uni ted States Patent and
Trademark Offi ce.
12SL, CENTRALSCOPE, I NTELLI RATE, MENTOR, and SUPERSTAT are trademarks of GE Medi cal
Systems I nformation Technologies.
2000966-387A Dash 3000/4000/5000 Patient Monitor i
Contents
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Manual information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Revision history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Manual purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Intended audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Ordering manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Responsibility of the manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Warnings, cautions, and notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Equipment symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Service information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Service requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Equipment identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
2 Equipment overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Patient monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Controls and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Exchangeable or compatible battery packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Optional components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Optional remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Software packages and software options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Software packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Software options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Ethernet communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
About Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Twisted pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Network Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Theory of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Overall patient monitor block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Data Acquisition System (DAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
ii Dash 3000/4000/5000 Patient Monitor 2000966-387A
Processor/power management subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Lithium-Ion battery power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Handle subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Storage and backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Optional thermal printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Installation overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Before you begin... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Back panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Power up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Before you begin... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Service menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Boot Loader Service Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Main menu service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Set print locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Service Mode settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Set Unit Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Set Bed Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Patient-Monitor Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Admit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Confirm or configure wireless LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Boot Code settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Set Defib Sync Voltage and pulse width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Set Line Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Set CIC and QS protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Set MUSE system protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Transcutaneous Pace Blank Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Set Country Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Set Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Enable or disable AFIB Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
2000966-387A Dash 3000/4000/5000 Patient Monitor iii
Enable or disable IntelliRate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Analog Out Buzz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Advanced user procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Set time and date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Transfer monitor defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
5 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Cleaning and disinfecting the patient monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Impact or results of improper cleaning products and processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Cleaning products to avoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Clean the print head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Cleaning, disinfecting and storing GE ECG cables and leadwires . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Cleaning and disinfecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Sterilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Improper cleaning products and processes impact or results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Cleaning products to avoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Cleaning other applied parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Battery maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
How to charge the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
How to condition the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
How to store the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
How to wake up the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
How to replace the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Rechargeable battery recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
About the Cadex SMart Two+ charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Clear the stored patient data memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
iv Dash 3000/4000/5000 Patient Monitor 2000966-387A
6 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Fault analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Required tools or equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Acquisition PCB symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Processor PCB symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Battery alarms and messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Battery messages displayed in the ECG waveform area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Battery messages displayed in the Battery Status information window . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Battery Messages Displayed in the Battery Fuel Gauge Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Writer or printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
No waveform at central station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Monitor defaults transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Storing monitor defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Copying stored monitor defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Change internet address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Review errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
View output or input errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Useful error data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Get error logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Get logs via PC using netUpdate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Get logs via CIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Get logs via Centralscope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Wireless LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Access Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Identify the wireless technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
802.11b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
802.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
2000966-387A Dash 3000/4000/5000 Patient Monitor v
7 Field replaceable units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Ordering parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Disassembly guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Before disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Hardware precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Remove or replace handle assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Remove or replace display assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Replace display flex assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Replace display assembly parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Open display assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Replace Dash 4000/5000 alarm light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Replace display inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Replace key pad assembly or Trim Knob control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Replace display assembly without LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Replace main unit parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Replace DAS assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Replace wireless card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Replace NBP pump assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Replace writer assembly or writer flex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Replace speaker assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Replace CPU/battery housing assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Replace power supply assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Replace battery door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Replace foot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Replace writer cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Recommended checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
vi Dash 3000/4000/5000 Patient Monitor 2000966-387A
8 Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Manufacturer recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Maintenance and checkout checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Visual inspection on page 5-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Cleaning and disinfecting the patient monitor on page 5-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Battery maintenance on page 5-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Electrical safety tests on page 8-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Checkout procedures on page 8-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Electrical safety tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Power outlet test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Power cord and plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Ground (earth) integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Ground (earth) wire leakage current tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Enclosure leakage current test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Patient (source) leakage current test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Patient (sink) leakage current test (mains voltage on the applied part) . . . . . . . . 8-12
BISx (option) current leakage tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Test completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Checkout procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Identify enabled patient parameters and software options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Patient monitor power-up tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
ECG tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Respiration tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Temperature tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Cardiac output tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Invasive blood pressure tests (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Pulse oximetry tests for GE Ohmeda SPO2 oximeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Pulse oximetry tests for Masimo SET SPO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Pulse oximetry tests for Nellcor OxiMax SPO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Noninvasive blood pressure tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
NBP calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Analog output and defibrillator synchronization tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
End-tidal CO
2
test (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Battery tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Graph or print tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Display test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Speaker test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Network test (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Remote control test (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
BISx test (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
2000966-387A Dash 3000/4000/5000 Patient Monitor vii
Wireless LAN test (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Dash Port docking station test (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
RAC 2A module housing peripheral device test (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
Data acquisition tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
ECG functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
Lead fail functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
Pace detect functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
Invasive blood pressure functions (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
Respiration functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Noninvasive blood pressure functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60
Checkout procedures completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
Repair log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
Appendices
Appendix A Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1
Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Performance specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-2
ECG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-3
Invasive blood pressure (BP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-5
Noninvasive blood pressure (NBP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-5
Bispectral index (BIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-7
GE pulse oximetry (SPO2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-7
Masimo SET SPO2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-7
Nellcor SPO2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-8
Cardiac output (CO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-8
Respiration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-9
Temperature (TEMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-10
Carbon dioxide (CO2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-10
Analog output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-12
Defibrillator synchronization pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-12
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-13
Paper recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-13
Wireless LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-14
Environmental specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-14
Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-15
Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-15
viii Dash 3000/4000/5000 Patient Monitor 2000966-387A
Appendix B Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . . . . .B-1
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Guidance and Manufacturers Declaration Electromagnetic Emissions . . . . . . . B-2
Guidance and manufacturers declaration electromagnetic immunity . . . . . . . . B-3
Guidance and Manufacturers Declaration Electromagnetic Immunity . . . . . . . . B-4
Recommended separation distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Compliant cables and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
2000966-387A Dash 3000/4000/5000 Patient Monitor 1-1
1 Introduction
Introduction: Manual information
1-2 Dash 3000/4000/5000 Patient Monitor 2000966-387A
Manual information
Revision history
Each page of thi s manual has the document part number and revi si on
l etter at the bottom of the page. The r evi si on l etter i denti fi es the
documents update l evel . The revi si on hi story of thi s document i s
summari zed bel ow.
Manual purpose
Thi s manual suppl i es techni cal i nformati on for servi ce representati ves
and techni cal personnel so they can mai ntai n the equi pment to the
assembl y l evel . Use i t as a gui de for mai ntenance and el ectri cal repai rs
consi dered fi el d repai rabl e. Where necessary the manual i denti fi es
addi ti onal sources of rel evant i nformati on and techni cal assi stance.
See the operators manual for the i nstructi ons necessary to operate the
equi pment safel y i n accordance wi th i ts functi on and i ntended use.
Intended audience
Thi s manual i s i ntended for servi ce representati ves and techni cal
personnel who mai ntai n, troubl eshoot, or repai r thi s equi pment.
Ordering manuals
A paper copy of thi s manual wi l l be provi ded upon request. Contact your
l ocal GE representati ve and request the part number on the fi rst page of
the manual .
Revision Comment
A Initial release of this manual.
Introduction: Safety information
Safety information
Responsibility of the manufacturer
GE i s responsi bl e for the effects of safety, rel i abi l i ty, and performance
onl y i f:
Assembl y operati ons, extensi ons, readjustments, modi fi cati ons, or
repai rs are carri ed out by persons authori zed by GE.
The el ectri cal i nstal l ati on of the rel evant room compl i es wi th the
requi rements of the appropri ate regul ati ons.
The equi pment i s used i n accordance wi th the i nstructi ons for use.
General
Thi s devi ce i s i ntended for use under the di rect supervi si on of a l i censed
heal th care practi ti oner.
Thi s devi ce i s not i ntended for home use.
Federal l aw restri cts thi s devi ce to be sol d by or on the order of a
physi ci an.
Contact GEfor i nformati on before connecti ng any devi ces to the
equi pment that are not recommended i n thi s manual .
Parts and accessori es used must meet the requi rements of the appl i cabl e
EN 60601 seri es safety standards, and/or the system confi gurati on must
meet the requi rements of the EN 60601-1-1 medi cal el ectri cal systems
standard.
Peri odi cal l y, and whenever the i ntegri ty of the devi ce i s i n doubt, test al l
functi ons.
The use of accessory equi pment not compl yi ng wi th the equi val ent safety
requi rements of thi s equi pment may l ead to a reduced l evel of safety of
the resul ti ng system. Consi derati on rel ati ng to the choi ce shal l i ncl ude:
use of the accessory i n the patient vicinity; and
evi dence that the safety certi fi cati on of the accessory has been
performed i n accordance to the appropri ate EN 60601-1 and/or EN
60601-1-1 harmoni zed nati onal standard.
I f the i nstal l ati on of the equi pment, i n the USA, wi l l use 240V rather
than 120V, the source must be a center-tapped, 240V, si ngl e-phase
ci rcui t.
Introduction: Safety information
Warnings, cautions, and notes
The terms danger, warni ng, and cauti on are used throughout thi s
manual to poi nt out hazards and to desi gnate a degree or l evel or
seri ousness. Fami l i ari ze yoursel f wi th thei r defi ni ti ons and si gni fi cance.
Hazard i s defi ned as a source of potenti al i njury to a person.
DANGER i ndi cates an i mmi nent hazard whi ch, i f not avoi ded, wi l l
resul t i n death or seri ous i njury.
WARNING i ndi cates a potenti al hazard or unsafe practi ce whi ch, i f not
avoi ded, coul d resul t i n death or seri ous i njury.
CAUTION i ndi cates a potenti al hazard or unsafe practi ce whi ch, i f not
avoi ded, coul d resul t i n mi nor personal i njury or product/property
damage.
NOTE provi des appl i cati on ti ps or other useful i nformati on to assure
that you get the most from your equi pment.
Introduction: Equipment symbols
Equipment symbols
NOTE: Some symbols may not appear on all equipment.
ATTENTION: Consult accompanying documents before using the equipment.
In Europe, this symbol means dangerous or high voltage. In the United States, this symbol
represents the caution notice below:
To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not remove cover (or back). Refer servicing to
qualified personnel.
Defibrillator-proof type CF equipment; type CF equipment is specifically designed for
applications where a conductive connection directly to the heart is established. The paddles
indicate the equipment is defibrillator proof.
Defibrillator-proof type BF equipment; type BF equipment is suitable for intentional external
and internal application to the patient, excluding direct cardiac application. Type BF
equipment is type B equipment with an F-type isolated (floating) part. The paddles indicate
the equipment is defibrillator proof.
Type B equipment; type B equipment is suitable for intentional external and internal
application to the patient, excluding direct cardiac application.
Equipotential Stud: A ground wire from another device can be tied here to ensure the
devices share a common reference.
Alternating current (AC)
Power; I = ON; O= OFF
Fuse
Battery
Indicates the Ethernet connection for the patient monitor.
POWER (Dash 3000/4000)
Introduction: Equipment symbols
Power (Dash 5000)
Standby (Dash 5000)
Main Display (Dash 5000)
Trend (Dash 5000)
Admit/Discharge (Dash 5000)
Print (Graph Go/Stop on older Dash 3000/4000)
NBP Go/Stop (on older Dash 3000/4000)
NBP Auto (Dash 5000)
Zero All
Silence Alarm/Admit
Medical Equipment
With respect to electric shock, fire and mechanical hazards only in accordance with UL
60601-1, CAN/CSA C22.2 NO. 601. and IEC 60601-1, IEC 60601-2-27, IEC 60601-2-30,
IEC 60601-2-34, and IEC 60601-2-49.
This symbol indicates that the waste of electrical and electronic equipment must not be
disposed as unsorted municipal waste and must be collected separately. Please contact an
authorized representative of the manufacturer for information concerning the
decommissioning of your equipment.
This symbol indicates the date of manufacture of this device. The first four digits identify the
year and the last two digits identify the month.
Non-ionizing electromagnetic radiation: To indicate elevated, potentially dangerous, levels
of non-ionizing radiation. Note - In case of application in a warning sign the rules according
to ISO 3864-1 shall be adhered to.
IEC 60878 note: See safety sign ISO 7010 - W005 Warning, non-ionizing radiation.
4P41
2005-08
Introduction: Service information
Service information
Service requirements
Fol l ow the servi ce requi rements l i sted bel ow.
Refer equi pment servi ci ng to GE-authori zed servi ce personnel onl y.
Any unauthori zed attempt to repai r equi pment under warranty voi ds
that warranty.
I t i s the users responsi bi l i ty to report the need for servi ce to GE or to
one of thei r authori zed agents.
Fai l ure on the part of the responsi bl e i ndi vi dual , hospi tal , or
i nsti tuti on usi ng thi s equi pment to i mpl ement a sati sfactory
mai ntenance schedul e may cause undue equi pment fai l ure and
possi bl e heal th hazards.
Regul ar mai ntenance, i rrespecti ve of usage, i s essenti al to ensure
that the equi pment wi l l al ways be functi onal when requi red.
Equipment identification
Every GE devi ce has a uni que seri al number for i denti fi cati on. A sampl e
of the i nformati on found on a seri al number l abel i s shown bel ow.
Description
A
product code
1
1. The current Dash patient monitor product code is SD0.
NOTE
Dash 3000/4000/5000 pati ent moni tors wi th the SD0
product code are onl y compati bl e wi th software
versi on 6.5 or l ater.
B year manufactured
C fiscal week manufactured
D production sequence number
E manufacturing site
F miscellaneous characteristic
### ## ## #### # #
A B C D E F
Introduction: Service information
2 Equipment overview
Equipment overview: Components
Components
Monitoring system
The Dash pati ent moni tor can functi on as a portabl e moni tori ng devi ce
wi th a bui l t-i n wri ter, or as a fl exi bl e care moni tori ng devi ce connected to
the opti onal Uni ty Network vi a Ethernet. I f usi ng the wi rel ess card or
Ethernet connecti on, opti onal components are a Cl i ni cal I nformati on
Center (CI C Pro ) and a Central scope central stati on.
Patient monitor
Thi s devi ce i s desi gned to moni tor a fi xed set of parameters i ncl udi ng
ECG, noni nvasi ve bl ood pressure, i mpedance respi rati on, SpO2, and
temperature. I nvasi ve pressure, BI Sx, and EtCO2 are opti onal features.
Addi ti onal speci al i zed features i ncl ude cardi ac output, cardi ac
cal cul ati ons, pul monary cal cul ati ons, dose cal cul ati ons, PA wedge (PA
wedge i s onl y avai l abl e wi th the i nvasi ve pressure opti on), I CG modul e
i nterface, and SAM modul e i nterface.
NOTE
For compati bi l i ty i nformati on, contact Techni cal Support.
Trim Knob
NBP Go/Stop
Zero All
Silence Alarm/
Admit
Graph
Power
Charging Status
A B
AC Battery
Dash 4000 monitor Dash 3000 monitor
001C 051D 003A
Dash 5000 monitor
Right side view
Al l of the pati ent cabl e connectors are l ocated on the ri ght si de of the
pati ent moni tor. A Trim Knob control provi des si ngl e control
operati on of vi rtual l y al l pati ent moni tor functi ons.
Left side view
On the l eft of the pati ent moni tor, you can fi nd the bui l t-i n wri ter and the
battery compartment.
Patient cable
connectors
002A
925B
A
B
Back view
Al l ports for equi pment and network are on the back of the pati ent
moni tor.
Name Description
A
Built-in writer
(optional)
The built-in, 4 channel writer is located in the
center of the left side of the monitor.
B
Battery compartment The battery packs are located in this compartment.
The battery compartment may be a single plastic
door or two silicone doors.
Name Description
A
line voltage selector This selector is factory set to match the line voltage
rating for your country.
B
audible alarm enunciator The internal speaker provides sound for audible alarms.
For better sound quality do not block speaker.
C
Defib Sync port Provides ECG analog output signals to user-supplied
equipment. A 5-volt, 2-millisecond artificial pacer spike
is added to the analog output when PACE is on and
detection occurs.
D
Aux port Used for RAC 2A, BISx and other compatible auxiliary
devices.
E
Ethernet port Used to connect a monitor to the Unity Network for
patient monitoring or for software installation.
004A
A
B
H G F E D C
Optional alarm light indicator
An opti onal al arm l i ght i ndi cator may be bui l t i nto the handl e of the
Dash 3000 pati ent moni tor or i nto the di spl ay bezel of the Dash 4000/
5000 pati ent moni tor. When acti vated, the LED i ndi cator fl ashes red for
Cri si s pati ent status al arms and yel l ow for Warni ng pati ent status and
system al arms.
Controls and indicators
The user i nterface consi sts of a fl at panel di spl ay and the keypad
assembl y that i ncl udes a Trim Knob control , functi on keys, and LED
i ndi cators.
Flat panel display
The acti ve-matri x col or l i qui d crystal di spl ay (LCD) i s assembl ed i nto a
shock absorbi ng i sol ator that fi ts wi thi n the pati ent moni tors front bezel
to protect the di spl ay from mechani cal shock duri ng use.
The acryl i c opti cal fi l ter protects the di spl ay panel from i mpact and
enhances vi si bi l i ty wi th i ts non-gl are surface coati ng on the vi ewi ng si de
of the fi l ter. I t al so has a scratch-resi stance surface coati ng.
Trim Knob control
The Trim Knob control i s a 24-posi ti on rotary control wi th a push
sel ecti on swi tch.
F
peripheral expansion
port
Used for connecting to a Dash Port

docking station
or other compatible auxiliary devices.
G AC power Used for connecting an AC power cable.
H
equipotential terminal For measurements in or near the heart we recommend
connecting the monitor to the potential equalization
system. Use the green and yellow potential equalization
cable and connect it to this pin.
Name Description
Alarm light indicator
Dash 3000 monitor Dash 4000 and Dash 5000 monitors
052B 536A
Function or power keys
Dash 3000/4000 patient monitors
Power, Print, NBP Go/Stop, Zero All, Silence Alarm/Admit.
Dash 5000 patient monitor
Power, Standby, Admit/Discharge, NBP Go/Stop, NBP Auto,
Print, Silence Alarm, Zero All, Trend, Main Display.
Power key
The pati ent moni tor i s powered at al l ti mes when i t i s pl ugged i nto AC
power. When the pati ent moni tor i s not pl ugged i n to AC power, press
thi s key to turn on and turn off the pati ent moni tor.
When AC power i s present, thi s key toggl es the operati onal mode of the
pati ent moni tor between normal operati on and stand-by mode. I n
standby mode pati ent moni tori ng di sconti nues. Onl y the chargi ng
functi on conti nues and the chargi ng status i ndi cators operate as
descri bed bel ow.
Indicators
Whi l e the pati ent moni tor powers up or changes between normal mode
and standby mode, al l four front panel i ndi cators i l l umi nate.
AC power indicator
The i ndi cator l i ghts green when AC mai ns power i s appl i ed to the pati ent
moni tor (i ncl udi ng when the pati ent moni tor i s i n the standby mode).
The i ndi cator does not i l l umi nate when the pati ent moni tor has no AC
mai ns power.
Battery power indicator
The i ndi cator l i ghts yel l ow when the pati ent moni tor i s operati ng on
battery power. The i ndi cator does not i l l umi nate when the pati ent
moni tor has no battery power. Battery i ndi cators are l ocated on the front
panel of the pati ent moni tor. They i ndi cate when battery power i s used
and the battery chargi ng status.
Charging status indicators
An i con for each battery i ndi cates i ts chargi ng status. The battery i con
l i ghts yel l ow when the respecti ve battery i s bei ng charged. I f both
batteri es are present and requi re chargi ng, then both i cons i l l umi nate
even though they wi l l be charged sequenti al l y. The battery i con l i ghts
green when the respecti ve battery i s ful l y charged.
When the pati ent moni tor i s operati ng under battery power the battery
i cons are not i l l umi nated. The i cons are al so not i l l umi nated when the
respecti ve battery i s ei ther not bei ng charged, not i nstal l ed, or has fai l ed.
The fol l owi ng tabl e expl ai ns what the chargi ng status i ndi cators mean.
NOTE
No speci fi c i ndi cator di sti ngui shes a fai l ed battery pack condi ti on
from a condi ti on where the battery i s not i nstal l ed or i s not bei ng
charged. Go to the Servi ce Menu for Battery Status. Refer to
Charge status indicators
Battery power indicators
Battery power
indicators
Charge status
indicators
Dash 3000
Dash 4000
Charge status
indicators
Battery power
indicators
Dash 5000
009A
053A
868A
Battery al arms and messages on page 6-7 for further i nformati on.
Battery status indicators
The battery status i ndi cators are l ocated i nsi de the battery
compartment. One green LED i ndi cator i s l ocated above each of the two
battery sl ots and l i ghts green when the pati ent moni tor i s recei vi ng
power sol el y from the respecti ve battery. The i ndi cators do not
i l l umi nate when the pati ent moni tor i s not battery powered.
Nei ther i ndi cator l i ghts when the pati ent moni tor i s operati ng from both
batteri es si mul taneousl y (e.g., i n a very l ow battery charge condi ti on
when both batteri es are joi ned together i n order to sustai n operati on of
the pati ent moni tor).
LED color Explanation
Yellow Two battery icons, labeled Charging Status A and B, illuminate yellow
when the respective battery is being charged. If both batteries are present
and require charging, then both icons illuminate yellow even though they
charge sequentially.
Green The icon lights green when the respective battery is fully charged.
No light The icon does not illuminate under the following conditions:
The respective battery is not installed.
The patient monitor is operating on battery power.
A failure condition has been detected for the respective battery.
Battery capacity gauge
On-screen capaci ty gauges i ndi cate the battery's current state of heal th
and charge status. A battery capaci ty gauge for each battery present
di spl ays bel ow the parameter bl ocks i n the l ower ri ght corner of the
di spl ay. The capaci ty gauge i ndi cates the remai ni ng charge capaci ty
(usabl e energy l eft) for each battery.
The capaci ty gauges fi l l i n from l eft to ri ght proporti onal to the battery
charge l evel . The sol i d porti on represents the ful l charge capaci ty of the
battery as a percentage of i ts desi gn capaci ty.
Exchangeable or compatible battery packs
WARNING
EXPLOSI ON OR FI RE - Usi ng non-recommended
batteri es coul d resul t i n i njury/burns to pati ents and
users. Onl y use batteri es recommended or manufactured
by GE. The warranty can be voi ded i f non-recommended
batteri es are used.
Dash pati ent moni tors runni ng software versi ons 5.4 or l ater onl y
recogni ze and charge GE recommended batteri es. Non-recommended
batteri es wi l l run, but not charge, the Dash pati ent moni tor. I f battery i s
l abel ed GE Approved, the battery i s compati bl e.
NOTE
I ncompati bl e batteri es di spl ay an ERROR message i n the Battery
Capaci ty Gauge on the bottom ri ght corner of the pati ent moni tor
screen.
Veri fy compati bi l i ty of an unmarked battery as fol l ows.
1. I nstal l a battery pack i n the pati ent moni tor.
2. Usi ng the Trim Knob control , access the Servi ce Mode menu
starti ng from the Mai n Menu. Sel ect MORE MENUS >MONI TOR
SETUP >SERVI CE MODE.
3. Enter password usi ng the Trim Knob control to sel ect the day and
month from pati ent moni tor screen wi th l eadi ng zeros. (e.g. Jul y 4 =
0407).
4. Sel ect BATTERY SERVI CE.
5. Veri fy that the MANUFACTURER NAME does not di spl ay
I NCOMPAT, NME, or UNKNOWN for the battery correspondi ng to
BATTERY A or BATTERY B sl ot.
Battery capacity gauges
809A
Optional components
RAC 2A module housing
The RAC 2A modul e housi ng currentl y supports the SAM and I CG
modul es.
An i ntegral power suppl y i s used to run the RAC 2A and support the
needed vol tages.
Dash Port 2 docking station
The docki ng stati on i s a qui ck mount/di smount base for a Dash pati ent
moni tor. I t gi ves the pati ent moni tor easy connect or di sconnect access to
AC power, Uni ty Network
, a remote di spl ay, and auxi l i ary devi ces.

See the Dash Port 2 Docki ng Stati on Operati ng I nstructi ons and the
Dash Port 2 Docki ng Stati on Servi ce Manual for addi ti onal i nformati on.
NOTE
When a Dash pati ent moni tor i s connected to the docki ng stati on,
onl y the docki ng stati ons Ethernet port i s acti ve. The Dash pati ent
moni tors network port remai ns i nacti ve unti l the pati ent moni tor i s
di sconnected from the docki ng stati on.
An opti onal remote di spl ay can be connected to the system for vi ewi ng on
a l arger moni tor, or i n a separate room. The remote di spl ay requi res:
Dash Port 2 docki ng stati on,
Dash 3000/4000 pati ent moni tor software versi on 5 or l ater, or
Dash pati ent moni tor software versi on 6 wi th Dash Port 2 software
versi on 2.0, and
Must be wi thi n 150 feet of the Dash pati ent moni tor.
797B
823B
ICG module
The I CG modul e (i mpedance cardi ography) measures and processes
pati ent hemodynami c data.
BISx
Avai l abl e i n software versi on 6 or l ater, BI Sx measures the effect of
anestheti cs and sedati ves on the brai n.
825A
935A
Wireless connection
The fl exi bi l i ty of the opti onal GE Uni ty Network i s i ncreased by usi ng
the wi rel ess network. The wi rel ess connecti on al l ows the user to roam
from one access poi nt to another, mai ntai ni ng a strong seaml ess
connecti on to the Uni ty Network. GE offers 802.11 and 802.11b wi rel ess
opti ons.
The pati ent moni tor, wi th i ts opti onal bui l t-i n wi rel ess card, functi onal l y
performs the same as a pati ent moni tor connected di rectl y to the opti onal
Uni ty Network. I t can be vi ewed at the central stati on and by other GE
moni tors on the network (e.g., Dash 3000/4000/5000, Eagl e
4000, and
Sol ar
pati ent moni tors). Pati ent moni tors wi th a wi rel ess connecti on
can send and recei ve pati ent data vi a the access poi nts to the Uni ty
Network.
NOTE
I t i s recommended that wi rel ess pati ent moni tors that are moved
from room to room have thei r pati ent moni tor type confi gured as
Rover or Rover/Combo moni tori ng.
To extend the Uni ty Network to a hospi tal s 802.11b wi rel ess network, a
proper i nstal l ati on and confi gurati on needs to be performed. To mai ntai n
conti nuous wi rel ess pati ent moni tori ng, refer to the wi rel ess LAN
Confi gurati on Gui de and contact GE for consul tati on i n i ntegrati ng the
Uni ty Network to a 802.11b wi rel ess network.
To i denti fy a pati ent moni tor wi th the wi rel ess opti on, l ook for the
wi rel ess LAN l abel .
940A
Wireless
LAN label
Optional remote control
The opti onal remote control provi des al l pati ent moni tor control s on a
portabl e component wi th a Trim Knob control , and al l ows the user to
operate the pati ent moni tor from across the room. Ei ghteen hard keys
are confi gured for adul t, neonatal , or operati ng room appl i cati ons.
821A
Equipment overview: Software packages and software options
Software packages and software options
Software packages
The Dash pati ent moni tor comes confi gured wi th the Basi c software
package. Thi s package consi sts of standard-of-care parameters, l ethal
arrhythmi a detecti on, dose cal cul ati ons, and features requi red by
cl i ni ci ans cari ng for acutel y i l l pati ents.
Two addi ti onal software packages can be purchased separatel y or i n any
combi nati on. These packages pr ovi de a var i ety of featur es that al l ow the
pati ent moni tor to be confi gured to best meet the needs of i ts i ntended
envi ronment.
The Cardi ac software package focuses on cardi ac conducti vi ty. I ts
features i ncl ude ful l arrhythmi a anal ysi s and storage, as wel l as ST
segment trendi ng, storage, and templ ates. The abi l i ty to adjust the ST
measurement poi nt i s al so i ncl uded i n thi s package.
The Cardi opul monary software package centers on cardi ac and
pul monary hemodynami cs. Features i ncl ude the PA i nsert and wedge
al gori thms, the i ntra-aorti c bal l oon pump al gori thm, and the
thermodi l uti on cardi ac output al gori thm, i ncl udi ng predefi ned
computati on constants for the catheters of major manufacturers. Al so
i ncl uded are cardi ac and pul monary cal cul ati ons.
Software options
Three software opti ons can be purchased separatel y or i n any
combi nati on wi th the software packages and software opti ons.
The Hi gh Resol uti on CRG Trends opti on provi des storage of up to 100
CRG events, and up to 24 hours of CRG trend data, i n addi ti on to the
CRG feature set found i n the Basi c software package.
The 12SL ECG anal ysi s program wi th Gender Speci fi c Cri teri a and the
Acute Cardi ac I schemi aTi me I nsensi ti ve Predi cti ve I nstrument (ACI -
TI PI ) anal ysi s opti on uses recorded ECG data to produce a numeri cal
score whi ch i s the predi cted probabi l i ty of acute cardi ac i schemi a. I n
addi ti on, the gender-speci fi c cri teri a i mproves the detecti on of acute
myocardi al i nfarcti ons (AMI ) i n women.
The Uni ty Network opti on enabl es you to vi ew other pati ents on the
network, i nterface wi th a central stati on and other network devi ces, and
perform Combo or Rover Combo moni tori ng.
Equipment overview: Ethernet communication
Ethernet communication
About Ethernet
The GE Uni ty Network uses Ethernet for devi ce to devi ce
communi cati ons. Thi s l ocal area network l i nks al l pati ent moni tors,
cl i ni cal i nformati on centers, and other GE equi pment throughout the
hospi tal . Dependi ng on the constructi on of the hospi tal , thi ck-net, thi n-
net, or CAT-5 twi sted pai r cabl i ng i s used. The Dash pati ent moni tor i s
desi gned to be used wi th twi sted-pai r cabl i ng. Consul t GE when tryi ng to
i nterface wi th ei ther thi ck-net or thi n-net cabl i ng. The real -ti me GE
Uni ty Network operates at 10 Mbps, hal f-dupl ex.
Twisted pair
Twi sted pai r i s the most popul ar cabl i ng because i t i s easy to i nstal l and
fl exi bl e to work wi th. I t uses the star topol ogy wi th a swi tch as the hub of
the segment. A maxi mum of 100 meter s or 328 feet i s the l ongest l ength
of twi sted pai r cabl e al l owed. The maxi mum number of devi ces on the GE
Uni ty Network i s 1,000.
Segment
Dash
Dash
CIC Pro
CIC Pro
Switches
1 to n
054B
Equipment overview: Ethernet communication
Network Terms
Node
Each network devi ce or node i s assi gned a Medi a Access Control (MAC)
Address number and requi res a network connecti on to i nterface between
the network devi ce and the network.
Media Access Control (MAC) address
A 48-bi t address assi gned by the manufacturer to uni quel y i denti fy a
node of the network. Thi s i s al so known as the Ethernet address.
Switch
To i mpl ement the star topol ogy, each network devi ce i s connected to a
network swi tch. The swi tch passes al l network data between each
network devi ce i n the star segment. Typi cal l y, the swi tch supports 12 to
48 network devi ces and may be l i nked to other swi tches to form l arger
networks.
Segment
A network segment i s compri sed of al l devi ces connected to one or many
swi tches whi ch are i n-turn connected together to form a l arger network.
The boundari es of the segment are defi ned by networki ng equi pment
that regul ate the fl ow of packets i nto and out of the segment (e.g. routers
and swi tches).
IP address
A 32-bi t (I Pv4) address assi gned by the user (ei ther stati cal l y or
dynami cal l y from a server) to uni quel y i denti fy the packets from a devi ce
for routi ng purposes.
Subnet
A subnet i s a l ogi cal segment of a l arger network that shares a common
I P address range as defi ned by a subnet mask. Proper subnetti ng can
i mprove the performance and securi ty of a network.
Equipment overview: Theory of operation
Theory of operation
Components
The pati ent moni tor i s housed i n a si ngl e package. The mai n components
of the assembl y are:
Power suppl y
Data Acqui si ti on System
Processor and power management subsystem (i ncl udi ng battery case
and expansi on port)
Speaker
Handl e subassembl y (i ncl udi ng the Al arm Li ght opti on)
Thermal pr i nter (opti onal )
Battery
Overall patient monitor block diagram
516A
Power supply
The subsystems wi thi n the pati ent moni tor operate from a common 9 to
18 V power bus. Due to the wi de vari ety of vol tages requi red by the
vari ous subsystems, power i s converted l ocal l y by each subsystem. Thi s
archi tecture resul ts i n an effi ci ent and compact system by reduci ng the
number of conversi ons requi red and opti mi zi ng the physi cal si ze of each
converter for the speci fi c appl i cati on.
When operati ng on AC mai ns power, the power bus vol tage i s 18 V,
generated by the offl i ne swi tchi ng power suppl y.
No AC mai ns power swi tch i s provi ded.
The l i ne vol tage range swi tch must be set to sel ect 115 V or 230 V (90 to
132 VAC or 190 to 264 VAC, respecti vel y).
Data Acquisition System (DAS)
Al l i nterfaces to the pati ent occur through the DAS. The ECG functi on
uses a di rect connecti on to the pati ent; therefore i t i s separatel y i sol ated
from the other functi ons (except respi rati on, whi ch shares the ECG
pati ent i nterface) to substanti al l y reduce coupl i ng of noi se and l eakage
currents to/from other functi ons. Al l remai ni ng DAS functi ons (e.g.,
pul se oxi metry, NBP, i nvasi ve pressure, temperature, cardi ac output,
and CO
2
) share a common i sol ati on barri er.
NOTE
The pati ent moni tor supports three SPO2 confi gurati ons, Generi c
Ohmeda SPO2, Masi mo SET SPO2, and Nel l cor Oxi Max SPO2.
DAS block diagram with generic Ohmeda SPO2
D
E
F
I
B

P
R
O
T
E
C
T
I
O
N

M
O
D
U
L
E

-
-

4
1
4
6
3
9
-
0
0
2
D
U
A
L

T
E
M
P
/
C
A
R
D
I
A
C

O
U
T
P
U
T
I
N
V

B
P
1
I
N
V

B
P
2
S
p
O
2
N
B
P
E
T
C
O
2
1
1

P
I
N
E
C
G
I
N
P
U
T
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
O
R
2
2
.
1
1
8
4
M
H
z
M
O
T
O
R
O
L
A
6
8
3
3
2
R
E
S
E
T

I
C
D
U
A
L

I
N
V
A
S
I
V
E

B
P

-
-

8
0
1
4
6
6
-
0
0
1
N
O
N
-
I
N
V
A
S
I
V
E

B
P

-
-

2
0
0
8
6
5
4
-
0
0
1
T
E
M
P

C
H
1

-
-

4
0
1
7
8
8
-
0
0
4
T
E
M
P

C
H
2

-
-

4
0
2
1
0
0
-
0
0
4
P
U
L
S
E
-
O
X
I
M
E
T
R
Y

-
-

8
0
1
3
6
8
-
0
0
1
N
B
P

C
U
F
F
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E

S
E
N
S
O
R
C
O
2

S
I
G
N
A
L

P
R
O
C
E
S
S
I
N
G

&

B
A
R
O

P
R
E
S
S

-
-

8
0
1
3
6
8
-
0
0
1
C
O
2

I
R

S
O
U
R
C
E

D
R
I
V
E

/

H
E
A
T
E
R

C
O
N
T
R
O
L

-
-

8
0
1
3
7
0
-
0
0
1
T
R
A
N
S
D
U
C
E
R
S
I
G
N
A
L
C
O
N
D
I
T
I
O
N
I
N
G
H
0
H
1
H
2
H
3
H
4
H
5
H
6
H
7
H
A
0
H
A
1
H
A
2
H
R
D
*
H
W
R
*
H
C
S
*
H
O
S
T
_
D
M
A
_
R
E
Q
*
+
3
.
3
V
+
3
.
3
V
+
5
V
+
5
V
+
9
-
1
8
V
+
9
-
1
8
V
G
N
D
G
N
D
G
N
D
G
N
D
G
N
D
G
N
D
G
N
D
G
N
D
S
E
R
I
A
L

_
D
A
T
A
_
I
N
S
E
R
I
A
L
_
D
A
T
A
_
O
U
T
N
B
P
_
E
N
A
B
L
E
R
E
S
E
T
*
7
.
3
7
2
8
M
H
z
6
8
H
S
C
0
5
R
E
S
P
I
R
A
T
I
O
N
C
O
U
P
L
I
N
G

C
A
P
M
U
X

&

A
/
D
V
R
E
F
D
C
-
D
C
C
O
N
V
E
R
T
E
R
S
E
C
O
N
D
A
R
Y
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
R
Y
+
1
2
V
-
1
2
V
+
5
V
+
1
2
V
-
1
2
V
+
5
.
5
V
B
A
R
O
M
E
T
R
I
C
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
S
E
N
S
O
R
(
M
O
U
N
T
E
D

O
N
8
0
1
3
6
8
-
0
0
1

H
Y
B
R
I
D
)
L
D
O
R
E
G
+
5
V
(
T
O
D
I
G
I
T
A
L
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
R
Y
)
I
S
O
L
A
T
I
O
N

B
A
R
R
I
E
R
I
S
O
L
A
T
I
O
N

B
A
R
R
I
E
R
I
S
O
L
A
T
I
O
N

B
A
R
R
I
E
R
D
C
-
D
C
C
O
N
V
E
R
T
E
R
S
E
C
O
N
D
A
R
Y
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
R
Y
D
C
-
D
C
C
O
N
V
E
R
T
E
R
P
R
I
M
A
R
Y
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
R
Y
D
C
-
D
C
C
O
N
V
E
R
T
E
R
P
R
I
M
A
R
Y
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
R
Y
+
9
-
1
8
V
+
9
-
1
8
V
3
8
.
4
K
H
z
P
S

F
E
E
D
B
A
C
K
C
O
U
P
L
E
R
7
.
5
K
V

S
P
A
R
K

G
A
P
D
I
G
I
T
A
L

D
A
T
A
C
O
U
P
L
E
R
S
P
S

F
E
E
D
B
A
C
K
C
O
U
P
L
E
R
D
I
G
I
T
A
L

D
A
T
A
C
O
U
P
L
E
R
S
T
R
A
N
S
C
U
T
A
N
E
O
U
S

P
A
C
E

-

B
L
A
N
K
I
N
G
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
7
.
5
K
V

S
P
A
R
K

G
A
P
D
A
S
_
I
D
0
D
A
S
_
I
D
1
ISOLATION
BARRIER
S
e
r
i
a
l
E
2
P
R
O
M
4
K

x

8
C
O
2
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
O
G
I
C
F
L
A
S
H
1
2
8
K

x

1
6
S
R
A
M
1
2
8
K

x

8
M
U
X

&

A
/
D
V
R
E
F
R
E
S
P
I
R
A
T
I
O
N

D
E
M
O
D
U
L
A
T
O
R

-
-

4
0
0
8
7
1
-
0
0
4
R
E
S
P
I
R
A
T
I
O
N

C
A
R
R
I
E
R

-
-

4
0
0
8
7
0
-
0
0
1
E
C
G

P
R
E
A
M
P

(
I
,
I
I
,
I
I
I
,
V
/
V
1
)

-
-

4
0
0
8
6
9
-
0
0
4
E
C
G

P
R
E
A
M
P

I
I

(
V
2
-
V
6
)

-
-

4
0
1
7
9
0
-
0
0
1
P
A
C
E

D
E
T
E
C
T

(
I
,
I
I
,
I
I
I
,
V
/
V
1
,
V
2
-
V
6
)
-
-

8
0
0
9
8
2
-
0
0
1
F
I
N
A
L

A
M
P

(
I
,
I
I
,
I
I
I
,
V
/
V
1
)

-
-

4
0
1
7
8
7
-
0
0
1
F
I
N
A
L

A
M
P

(
V
2
-
V
6
)

-
-

4
0
1
7
8
7
-
0
0
1
P
A
C
E

R
E
J
E
C
T

(
I
,
I
I
,
I
I
I
,
V
/
V
1
)

-
-

2
0
0
7
0
0
9
-
0
0
1
P
A
C
E

R
E
J
E
C
T

(
V
2
-
V
6
)

-
-

4
0
1
7
8
6
-
0
0
1
G
E
N
E
R
A
L
P
U
R
P
O
S
E
8
-
B
I
T
H
O
S
T
I
N
T
E
R
F
A
C
E
+
9
-
1
8
V
+
9
-
1
8
V
A
C
Q
_
T
I
M
E
R
_
I
R
Q
*
P
W
R
_
E
N
A
B
L
E
*
T
C
_
P
A
C
E
R
_
B
L
A
N
K
*
N
B
P
I
N
T
E
R
F
A
C
E
T
O

P
U
M
P
,
V
A
L
V
E
S

&
O
V
E
R
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
T
R
A
N
S
D
U
C
E
R
+
V
_
P
U
M
P
P
U
M
P
_
D
R
V
+
1
2
V
_
V
A
L
V
E
G
N
D
V
A
L
V
E
1
_
D
R
V
V
A
L
V
E
0
_
D
R
V
+
5
V
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
N
B
P
I
N
T
E
R
F
A
C
E
A
S
I
C
528B
The DAS bl ock di agram wi th generi c Ohmeda SPO2 consi sts of the
fol l owi ng three secti ons.
ECG
The ECG functi on detects heartbeats and arrhythmi as, measures heart
rate (HR) and ST segment devi ati on, and generates a 12SL di agnosti c
i nterpretati on. Pati ent al arms wi th adjustabl e hi gh and l ow l i mi ts for
HR and ST segment devi ati on are provi ded. Addi ti onal pati ent al arms
are provi ded for arrhythmi as and PVCs. System al arms for i ndi vi dual
l ead fai l ure and al l l eads fai l ure are provi ded.
The pati ent moni tor accepts the green 3, 5, and 10-l eadwi re Mul ti -l i nk
ECG connectors (compati bl e wi th Eagl e 3000 moni tor, Eagl e 4000
moni tor, and Tram modul es).
Respiration
The respi rati on functi on measures respi rati on rate (RR) and detects
apnea through the ECG l eadwi res usi ng the i mpedance vari ati on
techni que. Pati ent al arms for RR (wi th adjustabl e hi gh and l ow l i mi ts)
and apnea (wi th adjustabl e ti me l i mi t) are provi ded. System al arms for
l ead fai l ure, cardi ac arti fact, and l earni ng are provi ded.
Generic Ohmeda pulse oximetry (SpO
2
)
The pul se oxi metry functi on measures arteri al oxygen saturati on (SpO
2
)
and peri pheral pul se rate (PPR). Pati ent al arms wi th adjustabl e hi gh
and l ow l i mi ts for SpO
2
and PPR are provi ded. System al arms for probe
off pati ent, l ow-qual i ty si gnal , and pul se search are provi ded.
The pati ent moni tor accepts the bl ue col or-coded pul se oxi metry
connector (compati bl e wi th Eagl e 3000 moni tor, Eagl e 4000 moni tor, and
the Tram x50-seri es modul es). The pati ent moni tor wi th Generi c
Ohmeda SPO2 supports Nel l cor probes.
Section Description
ECG/Respiration Separately isolated section includes a 7.3728MHz 68HSC05
microcontroller, A/D conversion, signal processing hybrids and
DC-DC isolation converter.
Main DAS Separately isolated section includes a 22.1184MHz 68332
microcontroller with FLASH and SRAM memory, A/D conversion,
signal processing hybrids and DC isolation converter.
Non-Isolated
circuits
Includes serial and parallel host interfaces and NBP pump, valves,
and over-pressure circuitry.
Non-Invasive blood pressure
The NBP functi on measures systol i c pressure, di astol i c pressure, mean
pressure, and heart rate. Pati ent al arms wi th adjustabl e hi gh and l ow
l i mi ts for systol i c, di astol i c, and mean pressures are provi ded. System
al arms for defl ati on fai l ure, i nfl ati on fai l ure, maxi mum pressure
exceeded, measurement ti me exceeded, pul se too weak, hardware
mal functi on, and system pressure l eak are provi ded.
The NBP functi on operates i n manual , auto, and stat measurement
modes. The pati ent moni tor has backup protecti ons for magni tude and
durati on of appl i ed cuff pressure (wi th di fferent setti ngs i n adul t and
neonatal modes).
The pati ent moni tor accepts the rectangul ar NBP connector (compati bl e
wi th the Eagl e 3000 moni tor and some versi ons of the Tram modul e).
Invasive pressure
The i nvasi ve pressure functi on measures two bl ood pressures and
cal cul ates systol i c pressure, di astol i c pressure, mean pressure, and
pul sati l e pressure rate where appl i cabl e. Pati ent al arms wi th adjustabl e
hi gh and l ow l i mi ts for systol i c pressure, di astol i c pressure, mean
pressure, and pul se rate are provi ded for each channel . System al arms
for sensor status (fai l ure and di sconnected), Smart BP event (arti fact),
zeroi ng status (not zeroed, fai l ure, and pressure sensed), and PA Wedge
status (wai t, i nfl ate, processi ng, compl ete, and no pul se) are provi ded.
The user can set an adjustabl e l ow-pass fi l ter to 12 or 40 Hz. The 12 Hz
fi l ter i s i mpl emented i n software; the fi l ter i s di sabl ed at the 40 Hz
setti ng.
The pati ent moni tor accepts the red col or-coded i nvasi ve pressure
connectors (compati bl e wi th the Eagl e 3000 moni tor, Eagl e 4000
moni tor, and Tram modul es).
Temperature
The temperature functi on measures two temperatures. Pati ent al arms
wi th adjustabl e hi gh and l ow l i mi ts for temperature are provi ded.
System al arms for sensor and cal i brati on fai l ures are provi ded.
The pati ent moni tor accepts the brown col or-coded connector (compati bl e
wi th the Eagl e 3000 moni tor, Eagl e 4000 moni tor, and Tram modul es).
The pati ent moni tor supports both YSI Seri es 400 and 700 thermi stor
probes. The probe type i s determi ned by i denti fi cati on si gnal s i n the
probe adapter cabl e.
The temperature connector and measurement ci rcui ts are shared wi th
the cardi ac output moni tori ng functi on; therefore you cannot use both
functi ons concurrentl y. A si gnal i n the pati ent cabl e i ndi cates the
appropri ate functi on.
Cardiac output
The cardi ac output functi on measures bl ood temperature and i njectate
temperature, and uses the thermal di l uti on method to cal cul ate cardi ac
output. Pati ent al arms wi th adjustabl e hi gh and l ow l i mi ts for bl ood
temperature are provi ded. System al arms for sensor fai l ure and unstabl e
bl ood temperature are provi ded.
The pati ent moni tor accepts the brown col or-coded connector (compati bl e
wi th the Eagl e 4000 moni tor and Tram modul es).
The cardi ac output connector and measurement ci rcui ts are shared wi th
the temperature moni tori ng functi on. You cannot use both functi ons
concurrentl y. A si gnal i n the pati ent cabl e i ndi cates the appropri ate
functi on.
Carbon dioxide (CO
2
)
The CO
2
functi on measures i nspi red and expi red CO
2
and respi rati on
rate usi ng the i nfrared l i ght absorpti on techni que. The pati ent moni tor
connects to an external CapnoFl ex Low Fl ow Si destream modul e or
Novametri x Capnostat I I I sensor that cl i ps to an ai rway adapter i n the
pati ents venti l ati on ci rcui t. The ci rcui ts to dri ve the sensor and process
i ts i ncomi ng si gnal are l ocated wi thi n the DAS.
Pati ent al arms wi th adjustabl e hi gh and l ow l i mi ts for i nspi red CO
2
,
expi red CO
2
, and respi rati on rate are provi ded. An addi ti onal pati ent
al arm for no breath detected i s provi ded. System al arms for vari ous
sensor condi ti ons are provi ded.
The pati ent moni tor accepts the yel l ow col or-coded connector.
DAS block diagram with Masimo SET SPO2
931B
The DAS system bl ock di agram wi th Masi mo SET SPO2 and four
SuperStat BP channel s consi sts of the fol l owi ng three secti ons.
Parameter functions of the DAS with Masimo SET SPO2,
four BP channels and Dinamap SuperSTAT NIBP
Except for the SPO2 parameter and addi ti onal 2 I BPs, the DAS wi th the
Masi mo SET SPO2 parameter supports the same parameters as DAS
wi th the GE Ohmeda SPO2 parameter. Refer to 2-20.
Probes and cable
The Masi mo compati bl e DAS i s i ntended for use excl usi vel y wi th pul se-
oxi metry probes from Masi mo Corporati on. An adapter cabl e i s used to
i nterface the probes to the DAS front panel Ni col ay connector. The
Ni col ay connector uti l i zes a key pattern uni que to Masi mo.
Section Description
ECG/Respiration Separately isolated section includes a 7.3728MHz Motorola
MC68HSC705C8A microcontroller, A/D conversion, signal
processing hybrids and DC-DC isolation converter.
Main DAS Separately isolated section includes a 22.1184MHz Motorola
MC68332 microcontroller with FLASH and SRAM memory, an
Analog Devices ADSP-21062 32-bit floating point digital signal
processor running at 12.096MHz, A/D conversion, signal
processing hybrids/modules and DC-DC isolation converter.
Non-Isolated
circuits
Includes ECG and Main DAS isolation power conversion circuitry,
serial and parallel host interfaces and NBP pump, valves, and
over-pressure circuitry.
DAS block diagram with Nellcor 05 (OxiMax) SP02
+
3
.
3
V

D
E
F
I
B

P
R
O
T
E
C
T
I
O
N

M
O
D
U
L
E

4
1
4
6
3
9
-
D
U
A
L

T
E
M
P
/

C
A
R
D
I
A
C

O
U
T
P
U
T

I
N
V

B
P
1
/
B
P
3

I
N
V

B
P
2
/
B
P
4

S
p
O
2

N
B
P

E
T
C
O
2

1
1

P
I
N

E
C
G

I
N
P
U
T

C
O
N
N
E
C
T
O
R

4
-
I
B
P

a
n
d

S
U
P
E
R

B
P

-
-

2
0
1
3
3
2
9-
0
0
1
T
E
M
P

C
H
1
-
-

4
0
1
7
8
8
-
0
0
4
T
E
M
P

C
H
2
-
-

4
0
2
1
0
0
-
0
0
4
E
m
p
t
y

N
B
P

P
U
M
P

A
S
S
E
M
B
L
Y
N
B
P

V
A
L
V
E
/
M
A
N
I
F
O
L
D

A
S
S
E
M
B
L
Y
N
B
P

I
N
T
E
R
F
A
C
E
A
S
I
C
O
V
E
R
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
T
R
A
N
S
D
U
C
E
R
N
B
P

C
U
F
F

P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E

S
E
N
S
O
R

C
O
2

S
I
G
N
A
L

P
R
O
C
E
S
S
I
N
G

&

B
A
R
O

P
R
E
S
S

-
-

8
0
1
3
6
8
-
0
0
1
C
O
2

I
R

S
O
U
R
C
E

D
R
I
V
E

/

H
E
A
T
E
R

C
O
N
T
R
O
L

-
-

8
0
1
3
7
0
-
0
0
1
T
R
A
N
S
D
U
C
E
R
S
I
G
N
A
L

C
O
N
D
I
T
I
O
N
I
N
G
H
0

H
1

H
2

H
3

H
4

H
5

H
6

H
7

H
A
0

H
A
1

H
A
2

H
R
D
*

H
W
R
*

H
C
S
*

+
3
.
3
V

+
3
.
3
V

+
5
V

+
5
V

+
9
-
1
8
V

+
9
-
1
8
V

G
N
D

G
N
D

G
N
D

G
N
D

G
N
D

G
N
D

G
N
D

G
N
D

S
E
R
I
A
L

_
D
A
T
A
_
I
N

S
E
R
I
A
L
_
D
A
T
A
_
O
U
T

N
B
P
_
E
N
A
B
L
E

R
E
S
E
T
*

7
.
3
7
2
8

M
H
z

6
8
H
S
C
0
5
R
E
S
P
I
R
A
T
I
O
N

C
O
U
P
L
I
N
G

C
A
P

M
U
X

&

A
/
D

V
R
E
F
D
C
-
D
C

C
O
N
V
E
R
T
E
R S
E
C
O
N
D
A
R
Y
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
R
Y

+
1
2
V

-
1
2
V

+
5
V

+
1
2
V

-
1
2
V

+
5
.
5
V

B
A
R
O
M
E
T
R
I
C

P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
S
E
N
S
O
R

(
M
O
U
N
T
E
D

O
N

8
0
1
3
6
8
-
0
0
1

H
Y
B
R
I
D
)

L
D
O

R
E
G

+
5
V

(
T
O

D
I
G
I
T
A
L
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
R
Y
)

I
S
O
L
A
T
I
O
N

B
A
R
R
I
E
R
I
S
O
L
A
T
I
O
N

B
A
R
R
I
E
R
I
S
O
L
A
T
I
O
N

B
A
R
R
I
E
R
D
C
-
D
C

C
O
N
V
E
R
T
E
R S
E
C
O
N
D
A
R
Y
C
I
R
C
U
I
T
R
Y

D
C
-
D
C

C
O
N
V
E
R
T
E
R
P
R
I
M
A
R
Y

C
I
R
C
U
I
T
R
Y

D
C
-
D
C

C
O
N
V
E
R
T
E
R
P
R
I
M
A
R
Y

C
I
R
C
U
I
T
R
Y

+
9
-
1
8
V

+
9
-
1
8
V

P
S

F
E
E
D
B
A
C
K

C
O
U
P
L
E
R

7
.
5
K
V

S
P
A
R
K

G
A
P

D
I
G
I
T
A
L

D
A
T
A

C
O
U
P
L
E
R
S

P
S

F
E
E
D
B
A
C
K

C
O
U
P
L
E
R

D
I
G
I
T
A
L

D
A
T
A

C
O
U
P
L
E
R
S

T
R
A
N
S
C
U
T
A
N
E
O
U
S

P
A
C
E
-

B
L
A
N
K
I
N
G

C
O
N
T
R
O
L

7
.
5
K
V

S
P
A
R
K

G
A
P

D
A
S
_
I
D
0

D
A
S
_
I
D
1

S
e
r
i
a
l
E
2
P
R
O
M

4
K

x

8

C
O
2

I
N
T
E
R
F
A
C
A
S
I
C

F
L
A
S
H

5
1
2
K

x

8

S
R
A
M

1
2
8
K

x

8

M
U
X

&

A
/
D

V
R
E
F

R
E
S
P
I
R
A
T
I
O
N

D
E
M
O
D
U
L
A
T
O
R
-
-

4
0
0
8
7
1
-
0
0
1
R
E
S
P
I
R
A
T
I
O
N

C
A
R
R
I
E
R

-
-

4
0
0
8
7
0
-
0
0
1
E
C
G

P
R
E
A
M
P

(
I
,
I
I
,
I
I
I
,
V
/
V
1
)
-
-

4
0
0
8
6
9
-
0
0
4
E
C
G

P
R
E
A
M
P

I
I

(
V
2
-
V
6
)

-
-

4
0
1
7
9
0
-
0
0
1
P
A
C
E

D
E
T
E
C
T

(
I
,
I
I
,
I
I
I
,
V
/
V
1
,
V
2
-
V
6
)
-
-

8
0
0
9
8
2
-
0
0
1
F
I
N
A
L

A
M
P

(
I
,
I
I
,
I
I
I
,
V
/
V
1
)

-
-

4
0
1
7
8
7
-
0
0
1
F
I
N
A
L

A
M
P

(
V
2
-
V
6
)

-
-

4
0
1
7
8
7
-
0
0
1
P
A
C
E

R
E
J
E
C
T

(
I
,
I
I
,
I
I
I
,
V
/
V
1
)

-
-

4
0
1
7
8
6
-
0
0
1
P
A
C
E

R
E
J
E
C
T

(
V
2-
V
6
)

-
-

4
0
1
7
8
6
-
0
0
1
G
E
N
E
R
A
L

P
U
R
P
O
S
E

8
-
B
I
T

H
O
S
T

I
N
T
E
R
F
A
C
E

+
9
-
1
8
V

+
9
-
1
8
V

P
W
R
_
E
N
A
B
L
E
*

T
C
_
P
A
C
E
R
_
B
L
A
N
K
*

2
2
.
1
1
8
4

M
H
z

M
O
T
O
R
O
L
6
8
3
3
2

R
E
S
E
T

I
C

3
8
.
4

K
H
z

D
A
S
H

N
e
l
l
c
o
r

0
5

D
a
t
a

D
E
T
A
I
L
E
D

B
L
O
C
K

D
I
A
G
R
A
M

U
A
R
T

M
P
1
0
0

P
C
B

M
o
d
u
l
e

L
D
O

R
E
G

(
T
O

S
P
O
2

C
O
N
N
E
C
T
O
R
)
ISOLATI
ON

932A
The DAS bl ock di agram wi th Nel l cor 05 DAS PCB assembl y consi sti ng of
three secti ons:
The DAS desi gn i ncl udes the Nel l cor MP100 Modul e technol ogy. Nel l cor
SPO2 i s cl assi fi ed as moti on-resi stant. I t uses advanced di gi tal si gnal
processi ng al gori thms to extract very l ow-l evel SPO2 si gnal s i n the
presence of arti fact i nduced noi se.
The DAS contai ns al l ci rcui try necessary to support the MP100 Modul e.
The Nel l cor MP100 Modul e contai ns:
Al l SPO2 front end ci rcui try, such as the di gi tal l y programmabl e
photodetector si gnal condi ti oni ng, A/D conversi on, di gi tal l y
programmabl e back-to-back LED I R/RED emi tter dri ve and on-board
di agnosti c /sensor i denti fi cati on si gnal processi ng ci rcui ts.
A di gi tal si gnal processor (DSP), cl ock ci rcui try, and program
memory. The Nel l cor SPO2 al gori thms executes on the DSP. No
exter nal memor y i nter face i s pr ovi ded. The DSP i s "reset-abl e" by the
DAS CPU.
A UART for communi cati on of commands and data.
Parameter functions of the DAS with Nellcor OxiMax SPO2,
four BP channels and Dinamap SuperSTAT NIBP
Except for the SPO2 parameter and addi ti onal 2 I BPs, the DAS wi th the
Nel l cor Oxi Max SPO2 parameter supports the same parameters as DAS
wi th the GE Ohmeda SPO2 parameter. Refer to 2-20.
Probes and cable
The DAS i s i ntended for use onl y wi th Nel l cor di gi tal probes. I t i s not for
use wi th non-Nel l cor probes or wi th Nel l cor R-cal (resi stor i d) probes. An
adapter cabl e i s used to i nterface the probes to the DAS front panel
Ni col ay connector.
Section Description
ECG/Respiration Separately isolated section includes a 7.3728MHz 68HSC05
microcontroller, A/D conversion, signal processing hybrids and
DC-DC isolation converter.
Main DAS Separately isolated section includes a 22.1184MHz Motorola
MC68332 microcontroller with FLASH and SRAM memory, an
Analog Devices ADSP-21062 32-bit floating point digital signal
processor running at 12.096MHz, A/D conversion, signal
processing hybrids/modules and DC-DC isolation converter.
Non-isolated circuits Includes serial and parallel host interfaces and NBP pump, valves,
and over-pressure circuitry.
Processor/power management subsystem
Overview
The mai n processor/power management PCB contai ns the el ectri cal
hardware to provi de data processi ng and di spl ay of pati ent and moni tor
confi gurati on data, communi cati on and i nterface ci rcui try, and power
conversi on and battery management functi ons for the pati ent moni tor.
The hi gh l evel of i ntegrati on attai ned i n the desi gn of the processor/
power management PCB i s attri buted to the use of several hi ghl y
i ntegrated devi ces. A compl ex communi cati ons control l er, ASI C, and
battery management hardware si gni fi cantl y i mprove the performance
and reduce the compl exi ty and cost of the assembl y. I n addi ti on to the
CPU, the mai n mi crocontrol l er contai ns a si x-channel communi cati ons
processor as wel l as memory, PC Card, and vi deo control l ers. The devi ces
used i n the core processi ng archi tecture al l operate at 3.3 V to mi ni mi ze
power consumpti on, yet the mai n processor and ASI C are tol erant of 5 V
hardware peri pheral s.
Block diagram of microprocessor and power management subsystem
574A
Main microcontroller
The mi crocontrol l er contai ns two processors:
a true i nternal and external 32-bi t CPU core, and
a communi cati ons processor modul e (CPM).
The CPM contai ns an 8 ki l obyte dual port RAM to communi cate wi th the
CPU core, and once confi gured communi cates wi th external devi ces wi th
mi ni mum CPU i nterventi on. External l ogi c i s reduced by the i nternal
memory control l ers and a system i nterface uni t whi ch provi des a cl ock
synthesi zer and ti mers used i n thi s desi gn. Wri ter communi cati ons i s
supported by di rect memory access and processi ng performance i s
enhanced by 4-ki l obyte i nstructi on and data caches.
Microcontroller feature Patient monitor function
Serial Communications Controller 1 Unity Network
Serial Communications Controller 2 DAS communication
Serial Management Controller 1 Peripheral expansion communication
Serial Management Controller 2 Reserved
Interprocessor-Integrated Controller Batteries, battery charger,
Real-time clock,
EEPROM,
digital potentiometer for display
brightness control
Serial Peripheral Interface DAC for ECG and BP analog outputs;
ASIC configuration
User Programmable Machine A Memory controller for synchronous
graphics RAM
User Programmable Machine B Memory controller for synchronous flash
General-Purpose Chip-Select Machine Memory and peripheral device control
LCD Controller Color display
PC Card Controller Future use
DMA Writer communication
System Phase-Locked Loop (SPLL) Generation of system clock from crystal
oscillator
Microprocessor supervisory circuit, microcontroller internal Watchdog timer
The mi croprocessor supervi sory ci rcui t provi des rel i abl e operati on of the
mai n processor board. Thi s ci rcui t moni tors the +3.3 V power suppl y and
asserts a 140 mS acti ve l ow reset pul se when the power suppl y vol tage i s
bel ow +3.0 V duri ng power-up and power-down condi ti ons. A 3 V, 0.5 A
hour l i thi um batter y i s used to preserve the contents of two SRAM
devi ces and a real -ti me cl ock (RTC) when VCC i s bel ow the reset
threshol d.
System control logic
The system ASI C contai ns al l of the system control l ogi c for the
processor/power management PCB. Such functi ons i ncl ude address
decodi ng, peri pheral read and wri te control strobes, smart battery
control l ogi c, di spl ay control , mul ti pl e I /O ports, and front panel key
swi tch debounci ng.
Memory
Ei ght megabytes of non-vol ati l e memor y are pr ovi ded to suppor t the boot
code and expansi on memory such as hi gh resol uti on graphi c trends data
storage. The boot bl ock i s wr i te protected.
Ei ght megabytes of non-vol ati l e memory are provi ded to support the
mai n software appl i cati on code.
Si xty-four megabytes of vol ati l e memory are provi ded by the
synchronous graphi cs RAM. Thi s memory i s used for stack, vari abl e
storage, dynami cal l y al l ocated memory and vi deo data storage.
One megabytes of battery-backed SRAM suppor ts storage of 24 hour s of
1-mi nute resol uti on pati ent trends, an error l og contai ni ng 50 i nput
errors, and 50 output errors and storage for the CPM buffers.
The pati ent moni tor confi gurati on data such as I nternet and Ethernet
addresses, uni t name and bed number are mai ntai ned i n the 2 ki l obytes
EEPROM. The seri al devi ce resi des on the I
2
C bus.
Real-time clock
The real -ti me cl ock i ncorporates an on-board quartz crystal . Thi s feature
si mpl i fi es the desi gn and el i mi nates adjustments. The ti me of day on a
standal one pati ent moni tor i s mai ntai ned to an accuracy of 15 seconds i n
24 hours to support 24 hour trend data. The RTC devi ce i s one of the
devi ces on the I
2
C bus.
Audio subsystem
Audi o tones are generated usi ng a tone generator, an audi o ampl i fi er,
and an 8, 2.5-i n. speaker. The tone generator has bui l t i n D/A
converters and a mi xer to generate the dual frequency tones.
Frequenci es rangi ng from 150 Hz to 2800 Hz are produced.
Video subsystem
The mi croprocessor contai ns a vi deo control l er that supports real -ti me
and non-real -ti me waveform drawi ng, menu drawi ng, and parameter
di spl ay.
Di spl ay bri ghtness i s control l ed by a 50 k di gi tal potenti ometer. The
potenti ometer i s i nterfaced to the bri ghtness control i nput of an i nverter.
Analog outputs
Two anal og output channel s support ECG and BP. The pace pul se i s
generated on the mai n processor board and i nserted i nto the anal og out
ECG si gnal . The di gi tal -to-anal og conversi on for both ECG and bl ood
pressure output si gnal s are performed on the mai n processi ng board vi a
a two channel 12-bi t seri al DAC. Cal data i s stored on the processor/
power management PCB.
Defib Sync
The QRS compl ex of ECG data acqui red from the DAS generates the
marker-out si gnal . A software sel ectabl e pul se wi dth and pul se
ampl i tude i s provi ded i n the Boot Loader Menu.
Optional thermal printer
The thermal pri nter i ncl udes compl ete control of the pri nt head to pri nt
the desi red waveforms and text as wel l as moni tor power consumpti on.
The host processor on the mai n processi ng board has di rect
communi cati on vi a an 8-bi t data bus to the processor resi di ng wi thi n the
thermal recorder.
The +9-18 V power suppl i ed to the wri ter i s heavi l y fi l tered to provi de
the storage capabi l i ty to smooth power surges and transi ents caused by
abnormal thermal pri nti ng. Such pri nti ng may occur i f the pati ent
moni tor i s subjected to ESU noi se. I n addi ti on, a wri ter current l i mi ti ng
ci rcui t restri cts the current to the wri ter to 2.5 A. I f thi s current l i mi t i s
exceeded, the ci rcui t faul ts and requi res the current l i mi ti ng ci rcui t to
reset through a mi croprocessor port.
An al arm l i ght i ndi cati ng two l evel s of vi sual al arms resi des i n the
handl e of the Dash 3000 pati ent moni tor and i n the di spl ay bezel of the
Dash 4000/5000 pati ent moni tors. Red and yel l ow al arm l i ghts
i l l umi nate by addressi ng an ASI C output port. The Dash 3000 al arm
l i ght i nterfaces to the processor/power management PCB vi a the 40-pi n
wri ter i nterface. The Dash 4000/5000 al arm l i ghts i nterface to the
processor/power management PCB vi a the 100-pi n DAS/Di spl ay /
Keyboard i nterface.
PC card
The mai n processor contai ns a PC Card control l er, whi ch compl i es wi th
the PCMCI A standard. One 68-pi n ful l y compl i ant Type I I PC Card sl ot
i s supported i n thi s desi gn for wi rel ess card.
Peripheral expansion interface
A 20-pi n peri pheral expansi on i nterface i s provi ded to support future
use. An acti ve l ow peri pheral present si gnal may be pol l ed by software to
i denti fy when a peri pheral i s attached to the pati ent moni tor.
Asynchronous, AUX, and a swi tched Ethernet seri al communi cati on
channel s are supported as wel l as swi tched +9-18 V and +5 V power.
DAS communication
The mi croprocessor communi cates wi th the DAS processor usi ng the
second seri al communi cati on control l er (SCC) of the communi cati on
processor modul e (CPM). Thi s asynchronous communi cati on channel
operates at TTL l evel s and i s opti cal l y i sol ated wi thi n the DAS.
Optional Unity Network communication
The mi croprocessor provi des an Ethernet control l er, whi ch i s
i mpl emented on SCC1 i n order to benefi t from the addi ti onal buffer
descri ptors compared to SCC2. Ethernet packets are stored i n SRAM
buffers and are transmi tted and recei ved by the 10BASE-T transcei ver.
The Ethernet cl ocks are generated from a 20 MHz crystal osci l l ator
ci rcui t and the transcei ver. The transcei ver al so provi des a vi sual
i ndi cati on i n the form of four LEDS to i denti fy packet transmi t, recei ve,
col l i si on, and l i nk i ntegri ty. The status of recei ved data i s i ndi cated by
the l i nk i ntegri ty si gnal , whi ch i s used by the mi croprocessor to
determi ne i f the pati ent moni tor i s connected to the Uni ty Network.
An i sol ati on transformer provi des basi c i nsul ati on to the twi sted pai r
i nterface requi red to meet the ANSI /I EEE 802.3 standard (Ethernet).
I sol ati on i s requi red because duri ng transport the power cord wi th the
ground conductor i s not avai l abl e to provi de a path for a faul t condi ti on.
An 8-pi n RJ-45 port contai ni ng two i sol ated, di fferenti al pai rs i s provi ded
to connect the pati ent moni tor to a network hub.
NOTE
Power i s not provi ded i n the twi sted pai r i nterface as i n the
attachment user i nterface (AUI ) of other moni tori ng products.
Ethernet priority
Ethernet communi cati ons are pri ori ti zed i n the fol l owi ng order.
1. Top pri ori ty i s the Peri pheral Expansi on i nterface.
2. Next pri ori ty i s the Hardwi red Ethernet connecti on at the back of the
pati ent moni tor.
3. Lowest pri ori ty i s the opti onal wi rel ess connecti on.
I f none of the above exi st, then the pati ent moni tor i s a stand-al one
moni tor.
Async communication
Asynchronous communi cati on ports compl y wi th the GEMMS AutoPort
protocol and are provi ded through an 8-pi n RJ-45 port and the 20-pi n
peri pheral i nterface descri bed i n the next secti on.
Debug patient monitor and diagnostic LEDs
An i ntegrated debugger operati ng i n the debug mode wi thi n the mai n
processor provi des basi c emul ator-l i ke features such as modi fi cati on of
regi ster and memory l ocati ons and setti ng of breakpoi nts. The connector
requi red for thi s seri al communi cati on i s a dual row 10-pi n header. Thi s
connector i s l ocated wi thi n the pati ent moni tor and i s not i ntended for
fi el d servi ce use. Traci ng of i nstructi ons and l ogi c anal ysi s i s provi ded by
an adapter board that connects to a socket i nstal l ed on the mai n
processor board i nstead of the mi croprocessor.
Three di agnosti c LEDs l ocated al ong the front edge of the board are
provi ded for general purpose use and are under software control . The
LEDs i nterface di rectl y to port A of the mi croprocessor. A fl ashi ng green
LED i ndi cates normal moni tori ng operati on.
Main DC-DC converter section
The mai n DC-DC converter consi sts of two i ndependent synchronous
recti fi er buck regul ators wi th one common control l er.
The pati ent moni tor uses a poi nt of use power conversi on archi tecture
wi th +9-18 V bei ng the mai n power di stri buti on bus.
Four vol tage outputs are devel oped on the processor/power management
PCB:
+3.3 V,
+5 V,
+12 V, and
12 V.
Each one of the four outputs are i ndi vi dual l y current l i mi t protected
agai nst overl oad and short ci rcui t.
Battery subsystem
Battery chargi ng and control i s accompl i shed on the processor/power
management PCB.
The battery i s a smart battery and features an on-pack fuel gauge.
Lithium-Ion battery power
The pati ent moni tor i s desi gned to operate on battery power duri ng
transport or whenever AC power i s i nterrupted. A compl ete battery
management system al l ows you to obtai n maxi mum battery
performance. Audi bl e and vi sual al arms al ert you when l oss of power i s
i mmi nent and on-screen capaci ty gauges i ndi cate battery charge
condi ti on and capaci ty.
Dependi ng on usage, you can get up to 2.5 hours of run ti me per battery
for new, ful l y-charged batteri es. Moni tori ng NBP, CO2 and SpO2 drai n
battery power faster than other parameters. The di spl ay technol ogy and
bri ghtness, graphi ng, and connecti on to a wi rel ess network can al so al ter
battery run ti mes.
NOTE
A BATTERY LOW message at the top of the screen warns you pri or
to compl ete l oss of battery power. Repl ace the battery or connect the
pati ent moni tor to an AC power source when the message di spl ays.
The Li thi um-I on battery i s a rechargeabl e battery contai ni ng Li thi um-
I on cel l s. Each battery contai ns an i ntegrated el ectroni c fuel gauge and a
safety protecti on ci rcui t.
Impact of Lithium-Ion Battery technology on the battery
The fol l owi ng are key poi nts to know about Li thi um-I on battery
technol ogy:
The battery sel f-di scharges on i ts own, even when i t i s not i nstal l ed
i n a pati ent moni tor. Thi s di scharge i s the resul t of the Li thi um-I on
cel l s and the bi as current requi red for the i ntegrated el ectroni cs.
The battery sel f-di scharges. The sel f-di scharge rate doubl es for every
10C (18F) ri se i n temperature.
The capaci ty l oss of the battery degrades si gni fi cantl y at hi gher
temperatures.
As the battery ages, the ful l -charge capaci ty of the battery degrades
and wi l l permanentl y be l ost. As a resul t, the amount of charge that
i s stored and avai l abl e for use i s reduced.
How to improve battery performance
Installation guideline
Posi ti on the pati ent moni tor i n a l ocati on that does not arti fi ci al l y
i ncrease the operati ng temperature of the battery.
To opti mi ze battery l i fe and performance, choose a l ocati on that does
not arti fi ci al l y i ncrease the ambi ent temperature surroundi ng the
pati ent moni tor.
Do not pl ace the pati ent moni tor near a heat vent or near heat-
generati ng equi pment, such as computer moni tors.
Avoi d pl aci ng the pati ent moni tor i n corners where the ai rfl ow may
be restri cted.
Charging guideline
Use the Cadex SMart Two+ charger to charge the battery i nstead of
chargi ng the battery i nsi de the pati ent moni tor.
The Cadex SMart Two+ charger mai ntai ns a l ower battery cel l
temperature duri ng the charge cycl e than the pati ent moni tor. Thi s
reducti on i n temperature wi l l extend the l i fe of the battery.
The Cadex SMart Two+ charger charges one battery i n l ess than 4
hours and two batteri es i n l ess than 8 hours. When two batteri es are
used, the charger appl i es hal f of the chargi ng current to each battery.
Conditioning guideline
Remove the battery from the pati ent moni tor every si x months and
condi ti on i t usi ng the Cadex SMart Two+ charger. Thi s condi ti on cycl e
recal i brates the el ectroni c fuel gauge.
Storage guidelines
Do not purchase more batteri es than you wi l l use i n one year. The
battery does not have an i ndefi ni te shel f-l i fe. See How to store the
battery on page 5-12.
How to identify battery charge capacity
Battery capacity definitions
The fol l owi ng ter ms are used to defi ne the capaci ty of the battery:
Desi gn Capaci ty The theoreti cal capaci ty of the battery cel l s when
the battery i s new.
Ful l Charge Capaci ty The actual amount of charge the battery can
store and del i ver to the pati ent moni tor.
Remai ni ng Charge Capaci ty The amount of Ful l Charge Capaci ty
currentl y remai ni ng i n the battery. Thi s i s a percent of Ful l Charge
Capaci ty.
Identify battery charge capacity using the patient monitor
One new, ful l y charged battery l asts about 2.5 hours. Two new, ful l y
charged batteri es l ast about 5 hours.
A battery that has 100% Desi gn Capaci ty and i s charged to 100% of thi s
capaci ty l asts approxi matel y 2.5 hours. However, as the Ful l Charge
Capaci ty decl i nes, the approxi mate run ti me of a ful l y charged battery
wi l l decrease.
Single battery run time: approximately 2.5 hours An i con ful l y
outl i ned wi th sol i d l i nes and compl etel y fi l l ed i ndi cates a new battery,
ful l y charged to i ts Desi gn Capaci ty.
857A
Design Capacity and Full Charge Capacity
Single battery run time: approximately 2.0 hours The dotted
por ti on of the i con outl i ne shows that the battery has l ost 20% of i ts
Desi gn Capaci ty. The sol i d-outl i ne porti on i s fi l l ed i n, showi ng that the
battery i s charged to 100% Ful l Charge Capaci ty.
Single Battery Run Time: Approximately 1.0 Hours The dotted
por ti on of the i con outl i ne shows that the battery has l ost 20% of i ts
Desi gn Capaci ty. The sol i d-outl i ne porti on i s hal f fi l l ed i n, showi ng that
the battery i s charged to onl y 50% of avai l abl e capaci ty.
Identify battery capacity using the Cadex SMart Two+
charger
When you sel ect the Target Capacity swi tch on the charger, the
charger compares the batterys performance to a 60%, 70%, or 80% target
capaci ty set on the battery charger. I f the battery fai l s to meet the target
performance, the battery charger wi l l prompt you to condi ti on the
battery. I f after the condi ti on cycl e has been compl eted, the battery does
NOT meet the target performance, then the battery charger wi l l
i l l umi nate a fai l l i ght.
858A
Full Charge Capacity
859A
Full Charge Capacity
50% Available Capacity
Identify battery status using the BATTERY STATUS menu
Thi s menu opti on opens a menu and i nformati on wi ndow that provi des
current battery status i nformati on.
1. Sel ect MORE MENUS from the Mai n Menu.
2. Sel ect BATTERY STATUS to di spl ay the BATTERY STATUS
Menu and i nformati on wi ndow.
I f a battery i s not present, NO BATT di spl ays i n the SLOT
STATUS col umn.
I f communi cati on wi th the battery has fai l ed, NO COMM
di spl ays i n the SLOT STATUS row and UNKNOWN di spl ays i n
al l other rows.
I f a battery i s i ncompati bl e, I NCOMPAT di spl ays i n the SLOT
STATUS col umn and UNKNOWN di spl ays i n al l other fi el ds.
Battery Help menu
Each menu opti on opens an i nformati on wi ndow that i ncl udes the
fol l owi ng i nformati on:
RETURN Returns to the Battery Status menu.
SLOT STATUS Provi des defi ni ti ons of the battery condi ti ons.
NO BATT No battery i s i nstal l ed i n thi s sl ot.
I NI T... Battery i s just i nstal l ed, establ i shi ng communi cati on.
NO COMM Communi cati on wi th thi s battery has fai l ed
because i t i s ei ther sl eepi ng, defecti ve, or not a SMart Battery.
I NCOMPAT The battery i s not compati bl e wi th thi s pati ent
moni tors battery management system.
FAI L See message di spl ayed i n the l ower hal f of the di spl ay.
I N USE Thi s battery i s currentl y poweri ng the pati ent
moni tor.
FULL Ful l y charged.
CHARGI NG Currentl y bei ng charged.
I DLE Not currentl y i n use or chargi ng.
TI MES Defi nes ti me to empty and ti me to ful l .
TI ME TO EMPTY: The ti me to empty represents an esti mate
of how much l onger the pati ent moni tor wi l l be abl e to run wi th
the current moni tored parameters. Changi ng the setup, runni ng
NBPs, pri nti ng graphs, etc. wi l l l i kel y change the val ue of the
ti me remai ni ng. Thi s val ue i s onl y di spl ayed when the pati ent
moni tor i s powered by battery.
TI ME TO FULL: The ti me to ful l represents an esti mate of
the ti me remai ni ng before thi s battery i s ful l y charged. Total
recharge ti me for thi s uni t i s the sum of both batteri es ti me to
ful l .
FUEL GAUGES Expl ai ns the battery capaci ty gauges.
The fuel gauge i s fi l l ed from the l eft to ri ght proporti onal wi th the
batterys charge l evel . The ful l rated capaci ty of a new battery of thi s
type i s represented by a dashed outl i ne. The maxi mum charge l evel
for the battery currentl y i nstal l ed i s represented by a sol i d outl i ne.
As a battery ages, i ts maxi mum charge l evel becomes a smal l er
percentage of i ts Desi gn Capaci ty. The sol i d porti on represents the
current charge l evel of the battery as a percentage of i ts maxi mum
Ful l Charge Capaci ty.
835A
ALARMS Expl ai ns l ow battery and battery faul t al arms and
messages.
FAULT STATUS MESSAGES: General , chargi ng, and
temperature fai l ures i ndi cate that the battery has fai l ed, or the
chargi ng of the battery has fai l ed. Repl ace i t wi th a di fferent
battery.
CONDI TI ON: Condi ti on thi s battery usi ng an external
battery charger.
LOW BATTERY ALARMS: The pati ent moni tor wi l l i ssue a
System Warni ng al arm when there i s approxi matel y 10 mi nutes
per battery run ti me remai ni ng. The pati ent moni tor wi l l i ssue a
System Warni ng al arm when shutdown i s i mmi nent (l ess than
one mi nute l eft of remai ni ng run ti me).
Speaker
The speaker i s used for audi bl e noti fi cati on of al arms.
Handle subassembly
The handl e serves mul ti pl e purposes i n the pati ent moni tor. The
modul ar desi gn enabl es the user to add adapters for speci al i zed
appl i cati ons.
The Dash 3000 handl e houses the opti onal al arm l i ght. Thi s l i ght i s
vi si bl e for 360 surroundi ng the pati ent moni tor. The l i ght i s i ntended for
appl i cati ons when the audi bl e noti fi cati on i s not useful or effecti ve, such
as noi sy envi ronments (e.g., emergency vehi cl es) or qui et envi ronments
(e.g., neonatal car e areas). The al arm l i ght i ndi cates two l evel s of vi sual
al arms:
Cri si s al arms (red LED) and
Warni ng al arms (amber LED).
The handl e al so houses the wi rel ess card antennas requi red for the
opti onal wi rel ess card subsystem.
Interfaces
Ethernet
The Ethernet RJ-45 port provi des a hardware connecti on to the opti onal
Uni ty Network. The pati ent moni tor has a bui l t-i n transcei ver for
twi sted-pai r wi re. Basi c i nsul ati on (1500 VAC) i sol ates the pati ent
moni tor from networked devi ces.
AUX
The AUX RJ-45 port provi des an asynchronous communi cati on
connecti on to devi ces wi thi n the bedsi de care area. Basi c i nsul ati on (1500
VAC) i sol ates the pati ent moni tor from other devi ces.
Defib Sync
The Defib Sync port provi des si gnal s needed to perform synchroni zed
cardi oversi on wi th a defi bri l l ator. The Marker Out si gnal i s a pul se wi th
sel ectabl e ampl i tude and wi dth that coi nci des wi th the pati ents ECG R-
wave. The Marker I n si gnal i s returned to the pati ent moni tor by the
defi bri l l ator. The Marker I n si gnal causes the pati ent moni tor to i nsert a
defi b marker i n the di spl ayed ECG waveform.
Thi s por t al so pr ovi des two anal og si gnal s: ECG and i nvasi ve pressur e.
The pati ent moni tor provi des the top di spl ayed ECG si gnal wi th
reconstructed pace pul ses. You can use thi s si gnal to tri gger a
defi bri l l ator or i ntra-aorti c bal l oon pump. BP1 produces the pressure
si gnal and i s i ntended for tri ggeri ng an i ntra-aorti c bal l oon pump.
Peripheral expansion
Asynchronous communi cati on, Ethernet (shared wi th the Ethernet RJ-
45 port), 9-18 V power, 5 V power, and di screte I /O si gnal s are provi ded
i n the peri pheral expansi on i nterface ports. The expansi on port pai rs
wi th the AC mai ns power i nl et to suppl y power to the pati ent moni tor
through a peri pheral devi ce.
Wireless LAN
Initialization
I ni ti al i zati on begi ns on a card i nserti on functi on cal l from card servi ces.
The card i nserti on functi on checks the manufacturer and card I D.
I ni ti al i zati on i ncl udes:
Access Confi gurati on Regi ster - Set through card servi ces to the
manufacturer's recommended val ue.
The MAC Addr ess i s set to the Dash's MAC addr ess to pr ovi de
seaml ess transi ti on from hardwi re to wi rel ess and back.
SSI D - Set to stored val ue. Thi s I D must be the same between a card
and an access poi nt for them to associ ate.
Reception
The read task wai ts on a recei ve i nterrupt from the card. When
awakened, the packet l ength i s val i dated and the packet i s copi ed i nto an
ethernet buffer. A transfer functi on usi ng byte-si zed transfers i s used to
ensure the access ti me to the card i s mi ni mi zed. The packet l ength and
poi nter i s returned to the ethernet stream.
Transmission
The wr i te task wai ts on a transmi ssi on packet to be queued. When
awakened, the card i s checked for associ ati on to an access poi nt and for
an avai l abl e transmi t buffer. Transmi ts are di scarded i f both are not
true. The packet i s copi ed i nto the card and a transmi t command i s
i ssued to the card. The transmi t task wai ts on a transmi t compl ete
i nterrupt from the card. Thi s ensures a transmi t buffer wi l l be ready for
the wri te.
Error handling
The card does not support parti al packets or other recei ve errors. On a
transmi t error the buffer wi l l not be resent. Other events l i ke buffer and
queue overfl ows are reported through the error l og system.
Association status
Each associ ati on change i s reported through the error l og system.
Command queue
Commands are queued i f the Wai t On Command (WOC) bi t i ndi cates the
card has not compl eted the previ ous command. Commands that must
compl ete are i ssued through a functi on cal l that ensures the command i s
compl eted before returni ng. Thi s functi on del ays between each check of
the card to al l ow other tasks to run and must not be cal l ed wi th
i nterrupts off or from wi thi n an i nterrupt.
Card enable/disable
The pati ent moni tor network task determi nes whi ch acti ve network
medi a shoul d be used for ethernet communi cati on. The peri pheral
connector has the hi ghest pri ori ty fol l owed by the rear connector then
wi rel ess. I nterrupts to the wi rel ess card are di sabl ed unti l an enabl e
wi rel ess cal l i s made by the pati ent moni tor network task. Di sabl i ng the
card si mpl y turns these i nterrupts back off. Card events l i ke associ ati on
changes and recei ve overfl ows may be l ogged when i nterrupts are
enabl ed, but thi s provi des faster swi tch over between hardwi re and
wi rel ess than resetti ng the card and re-i ni ti al i zi ng i t on an enabl e.
Storage and backup
Program code storage
Executabl e program code for the mai n processor, DAS processor, and
thermal pri nter are stored i n non-vol ati l e programmabl e memory. To
di spl ay the revi si on of the currentl y stored code, access the submenu of
the mai n appl i cati ons Moni tor Setup menu.
Patient monitor settings
The processor/power management PCB stores defaul t pati ent moni tor
setti ngs i n non-vol ati l e memory. The user must restore the ori gi nal
setti ngs i f repl aci ng the board.
Patient data storage
Stati c RAM backed up by a l i thi um battery sol dered onto the processor/
power management PCB stores pati ent data.
Time and date
A pati ent moni tor on the network mai ntai ns ti me and date for at l east
fi ve years. Ti me i s accurate to wi thi n one second i n ten hours. The cl ock
i s synchroni zed wi th a ti me master on the opti onal Uni ty Network.
Calibration data
Cal i brati on factors for NBP and CO
2
are stored i n non-vol ati l e memory
on the DAS board.
Cal i brati on factors for the anal og output si gnal s are stored i n non-
vol ati l e memory on the processor/power management PCB.
Error log
I nput and output errors are retai ned i n stati c RAM backed up by a
l i thi um battery sol dered onto the processor/power management PCB.
Contents are retai ned for at l east fi ve years, provi ded that you exerci se
cauti on when you handl e the board to prevent i nadvertentl y di schargi ng
the battery (e.g. when you shi p the board for probl em di agnosi s).
Optional thermal printer
The pati ent moni tor uses the same 50-mm thermal pri nter modul e that
i s used i n the PRN 50 stand-al one pri nter. I t pri nts up to four waveforms
at chart speeds rangi ng from 0.1 to 50 mm/s. The pri nter software i s
l oaded i ndependentl y from the pati ent moni tors software.
I n the pati ent moni tor, the pri nter modul e l i mi ts i ts current consumpti on
to stay wi thi n i ts al l ocated system power budget.
3 Installation
Installation: Installation overview
Installation overview
The fol l owi ng i l l ustr ates the i nstal l ati on steps for pati ent-r eady
moni tori ng.
Unpack equipment and
inventory contents.
Go to Checkout on page 8-1 and
perform all recommended inspection
and safety procedures.
Insert two batteries into the battery
compartment slots.
(Charge batteries for 4 hours before
using device on patients.)
Connect power cord to Dash patient
monitor, then plug into AC power
outlet.
Connect peripheral equipment and
network, if applicable.
Power up the Dash monitor.
Go to Configuration on page 4-1 to
configure for stand-alone or
networked monitoring.
Connect patient cables per the
Operators Manual.
Installation: Before you begin...
Before you begin...
The fol l owi ng i nstal l ati on i nfor mati on assumes that the equi pment has
been unpacked and al l procedures i n Checkout on page 8-1 have been
compl eted. I f i ntendi ng to use the Dash pati ent moni tor under battery
power, consi der chargi ng the batteri es i n a charger duri ng the checkout
procedures. Otherwi se, i nsert batteri es i n the battery compartment as
shown.
CAUTION
Leaks from battery cel l s can occur under extreme
condi ti ons. The l i qui d i s causti c to eyes and ski n. I f the
l i qui d comes i nto contact wi th eyes or ski n, fl ush wi th
cl ean water and seek medi cal attenti on.
The battery compartment i s l ocated on the l ower l eft si de of the pati ent
moni tor. Dependi ng on your model , the battery doors may be one of the
two vari ati ons shown bel ow. Battery i ndi cators l et you know when the
pati ent moni tor i s usi ng battery power.
WARNING
Make sure the batteri es are compl etel y i nserted and that
the battery door i s securel y l atched. Fal l i ng batteri es
coul d seri ousl y or fatal l y i njure a neonatal pati ent.
634B
635A
Insert this end first
928A
Insert the battery packs in
the battery compartment.
The battery compartment
may be a single plastic
door or two silicone doors.
Battery status indicator
Installation: Connections
Connections
Back panel connections
The back of the pati ent moni tor has al l ports for equi pment and network
connecti ons.
ETHERNET
The ETHERNET port provi des an ANSI /I EEE 802.3 10BaseT Ethernet
standard i nterface to the Uni ty Network.
RAC 2A housing connectors
The RAC 2A modul e housi ng connects to the pati ent moni tor vi a a
standard category 5 patch cabl e (PN 418335-002) that pl ugs i nto the Aux
port on the pati ent moni tor and to the Auto Port on the back of the RAC
2A modul e housi ng.
BISx module
The BI Sx modul e connects to the pati ent moni tor vi a a RJ-45 cabl e that
pl ugs i nto the Aux port on the pati ent moni tor and a Y-cabl e. One end of
the Y-cabl e pl ugs i nto a power suppl y and the other end pl ugs i nto the
BI Sx modul e cabl e.
ETHERNET
Defib Sync connector
Aux Port
C power connector
004A
peripheral expansion port
The RAC 2A modul e housi ng does not have an Anal og Output connector.
Remote control
The remote control connects to the pati ent moni tor vi a a communi cati ons
cabl e whi ch pl ugs i nto an Autoport to M-port adapter before i t i s i nserted
i nto the Aux port on the Dash pati ent moni tor or the Dash Port docki ng
stati on.
The remote control i s programmed for speci fi c care areas (adul t,
neonatal , or operati ng room).
NOTE
The error message WARNI NG: REMOTE MI SMATCHED WI TH
MONI TORI NG MODE di spl ays i f a mi smatched remote control i s
connected to the pati ent moni tor.
AC power
Auto Port to the patient
monitors Aux Port
Async Comm
power switch
006A
822A
remote control
Aux port adapter
Defib sync
The connector provi des ECG anal og output si gnal s to user-suppl i ed
equi pment.
CAUTION
Equi pment damage. Connect al l peri pheral equi pment
before pl uggi ng the power cord i nto an AC outl et.
Otherwi se, connectors may be damaged.
AC power
Use thi s connector to appl y power to the pati ent moni tor. The pati ent
moni tor wi l l be powered at al l ti mes when usi ng AC power (there i s no
AC power swi tch). The pati ent moni tor i s preset at the factory for a
speci fi c l i ne vol tage. Before appl yi ng power, veri fy the pati ent moni tors
l i ne vol tage setti ng matches your power suppl y. I f requi red, use a smal l
bl aded screw dri ver to change the l i ne vol tage setti ng. Refer to the l abel
on the back of the uni t for the vol tage and current requi rements.
Power up
After maki ng al l connecti ons, pl ug the power cord i nto an AC wal l outl et.
When al l cabl es are properl y connected, press the Power button to turn
the pati ent moni tor on. Al l front panel i ndi cators wi l l i l l umi nate unti l
the power-up sequence i s compl ete. After approxi matel y 20 seconds you
shoul d see a di spl ay on the screen.
Configure
Go to Confi gurati on on page 4-1 to confi gure and set up the Dash
pati ent moni tor for pati ent use.
115V
line voltage selector:
115V for a 100-120V power source
230V for a 220-240V power source
004A
829A
4 Configuration
Configuration: Before you begin...
Before you begin...
To confi gure a new pati ent moni tor, you must fi rst:
know that the new pati ent moni tors software revi si on i s compati bl e
wi th the other pati ent moni tors connected to the Uni ty Network.
wri te down the exact care uni t name from the central stati on.
wri te down the bed name for the new pati ent moni tor.
know i f the pati ent moni tor wi l l be used for ei ther stati onary or
ambul atory (tel emetry) moni tori ng or both.
know i f the pati ent moni tor wi l l be connected to a wi rel ess network.
know i f the pati ent moni tor wi l l be moved from one i nternet
connecti on to another.
Thi s secti on expl ai ns how to confi gure a pati ent moni tor i n both types of
pati ent moni tori ng system confi gurati ons:
Stand-al one pati ent moni tor the moni tor i s not i nterconnected to
other pati ent moni tori ng system devi ces, and
Networked pati ent moni tor the moni tor i s i nterconnected to other
pati ent moni tori ng system devi ces over the Uni ty Network for the
sake of shari ng pati ent data. The pati ent moni tor communi cates
wi th central stati ons, pri nters, and other rel ated equi pment. Thi s
network i s essenti al l y an i nternet i mpl ementati on.
NOTE
The Uni ty Network i s a purchased opti on.
Configuration: Service menus
Service menus
There are two di sti nct servi ce menus for the pati ent moni tor. The Boot
Loader Servi ce Menu i s found i n the Boot Code and i s used for
confi guri ng the pati ent moni tor or when downl oadi ng the Boot Code and
mai n processor code. The Servi ce Mode menu i s l ocated from the Mai n
Menu and i s used for vari ous functi ons l i ke moni tor setti ngs, cal i brati on,
graph tests, and downl oadi ng pati ent moni tor i nterface software.
WARNING
The Boot Loader Ser vi ce Menu and the Ser vi ce Mode
menus are i ntended for qual i fi ed personnel onl y. Do not
experi ment wi th any commands found i n the servi ce
menus. Experi menti ng wi th servi ce commands can l ead
to l ost pati ent data, damaged operati ng system software
for the pati ent moni tor, and even affect the Uni ty
Network.
Boot Loader Service Menu
Acti vate the Boot Loader program as fol l ows:
1. Hol d down NBP Go/Stop (or NBP Auto on Dash 5000) and ZERO
ALL (FUNCTION) on the front panel .
2. Press and rel ease the Trim Knob control .
3. Keep holding NBP Go/Stop (or NBP Auto) and ZERO ALL
(FUNCTION) unti l the Boot Loader i nformati on appears on the
di spl ay.
Fol l owi ng i s a l i st of opti ons i n the boot code servi ce menu.
Boot Loader Service Menu options
Menu Option Description
CHANGE INTERNET
ADDRESS
This option is used when changing the internet
protocol (IP) address.
WARNING
Dupl i cati on of an I nternet address on a network
causes data l oss and possi bl e Uni ty Network
probl ems. I f you change the factory assi gned I nternet
address, you must record al l other I nternet addresses
used on your network to avoi d dupl i cati on.
SHOW INSTALL OPTIONS This option lists the options installed on the patient
monitor.
CLEAR CONFIGURATION
MEMORY
This option erases all patient histories and
programmed defaults in the monitors protected
memory. Clearing the configuration memory returns
the patient monitor defaults to the factory installed
defaults.
SET CONFIGURATION This menu contains options for configuring the patient
monitor. Refer to Boot Code settings on page 4-16.
VIDEO TEST SCREENS Various color screens for testing the display.
BATTERY SIMULATION This option is for engineering use only.
WAKE UP BATTERY This option is used when the battery is dead. Refer to
How to wake up the battery on page 5-12.
OPTIONS MENU A unique password is required for each option.
Contact your sales/service representative to obtain a
password. You must provide your product serial
number and internet address. (The internet address
is displayed in the Boot Code banner information.)
Main menu service mode
The Servi ce Mode menu opti on i tems provi de the servi ce techni ci an
access to general and techni cal bui l t-i n software functi ons of the pati ent
moni tor. Onl y persons responsi bl e for confi guri ng and mai ntai ni ng the
pati ent moni tor shoul d access the servi ce mode menu opti on i tems.
The servi ce techni ci an can use the Servi ce Mode menu to:
rel ay software i nformati on to desi gn engi neers,
cal i brate and troubl eshoot NBP functi ons of the pati ent moni tor,
set admi t menu opti ons, operati ng mode of the pati ent moni tor, and
moni tor defaul t password,
confi gure the pati ent moni tor uni t name, bed number and I nternet
address for use on the network, and
enter or change the ti me and date on the pati ent moni tor.
WARNING
The Boot Loader Ser vi ce Menu and the Ser vi ce Mode
menus are i ntended for qual i fi ed personnel onl y. Do not
experi ment wi th any commands found i n the servi ce
menus. Experi menti ng wi th servi ce commands can l ead
to l ost pati ent data, damaged operati ng system software
for the pati ent moni tor, and even affect the Uni ty
Network.
Access the Service Mode
Access the Servi ce Mode menu starti ng from the Mai n menu.
1. Sel ect MORE MENUS >MONI TOR SETUP >SERVI CE MODE >
0407).
Service Mode options
Fol l owi ng i s a l i st of opti ons i n the mai n code servi ce menu.
Service Mode menu options
Menu option Description
REVIEW ERRORS For advanced troubleshooting by GE engineers. Error
log data can be transferred over the network to a central
station and then loaded onto a diskette for review. Refer
to Error messages on page 6-5 for details.
CALIBRATE For checkout or calibration of the noninvasive blood
pressure, ECG analog output, BP analog output, CO
2

service, and SAM service menu functions of the patient
monitor.
BATTERY SERVICE Provides battery data.
NOTE
I f an I NCOMPAT message di spl ays i n the Manufacturer Name
col umn and UNKNOWN di spl ays i n al l other col umns, the
i nstal l ed battery i s i ncompati bl e.
PATIENT-MONITOR TYPE For selecting the type of patient monitor desired, i.e
adult, neonatal or operating room. Refer to Patient-
Monitor Type on page 4-12 for detailed procedures.
WARNING
Changi ng the pati ent-moni tor type wi l l defaul t the
admi t functi on to Standard confi gurati on. Di fferent
al arms and parameters are acti vated for each sel ecti on.
NOTE
The keypad/remote control i s DI DCA programmed for speci fi c
pati ent moni tor types. The error message, WARNI NG:
REMOTE MI SMATCHED WI TH MONI TORI NG MODE
di spl ays i f the pati ent moni tor and keypad/remote control do not
match.
MENU SETUP Provides the following sub-menus: (Refer to Service
Mode settings on page 4-11 for detailed procedures.)
ADMIT MENU: STANDARD
Allows you to determine the function of the patient
monitor. The four variables include stationary or
ambulatory (telemetry) patient monitoring with a
monitor that always stays in one room (STANDARD)
or a monitor that moves from room to room (ROVER).
MONITOR DEFAULTS PASSWD
Allows you to set the patient monitor so that a
password is Required or Not Required for entry into
the Monitor Defaults menu section. If selected, the
password will be the same as the Service Mode menu
password.
MONITOR SETTINGS Provides the following sub-menus: (Refer to Service
Mode settings on page 4-11 for detailed procedures.)
SET UNIT NAME
Allows changes to the care unit name. After initial
setup, this name should not be changed or
communication to the central station will be corrupted.
Note that the care unit name must be registered
exactly the same in the central station and the patient
monitor.
SET BED NUMBER
Allows changes to the bed number. After initial setup,
this number should not be changed or communication
to the central station will be corrupted. Note that the
bed number must be registered exactly the same in
the central station and the patient monitor.
SET INTERNET ADDRESS
Allows changes to the internet (IP) address. An
incorrect internet address may also prevent the
patient monitor from viewing other monitors on the
network even though the unit names match. Whether
or not this can occur depends on the network topology
at the installed site.
WARNING
Dupl i cati on of an i nternet (I P) address on a network
causes l ost data. I f you change the factory assi gned
i nternet address, you must fi rst record al l other i nternet
addresses used on your network to avoi d dupl i cati on.
NOTE
An i ncorrect i nternet address may al so prevent the pati ent
moni tor from vi ewi ng other moni tors on the network even
though the uni t names match. Whether or not thi s can occur
depends on the network topol ogy at the i nstal l ed si te.
Service Mode menu options (Continued)
MONITOR SETTINGS (cont.) CONFIGURE WIRELESS LAN
Enable and configure the wireless LAN option. (Refer
to Confirm or configure wireless LAN on page 4-14
for detailed procedures.)
WIRELESS LAN STATUS
Displays wireless LAN status.
STORE DEFAULTS FOR NETWORK TRANSFER
Saves the patient monitor defaults for transfer to
another patient monitor with the same software
version, software package, patient monitor type, and
country code. It stores all patient monitor defaults,
(including WLAN configuration) custom default
names, and 12 SL location and site.
SET LOCATION ID
Enter the location identification for the MUSE system.
SET SITE NUMBER
Enter a site number if your institution has multiple
buildings. A MUSE system can be used as a site
number.
COPY UNIT DEFAULTS Use to copy patient monitor defaults from one patient
monitor to another patient monitor. Refer to
Configuration on page 4-1 for detailed procedures.
PRINT TEST PATTERN Allows you to run a graph test pattern. The choices are
Start and Stop.
TIME AND DATE Allows changes to the time and date and may affect the
time and date for the entire monitoring network. (Refer to
Set time and date on page 4-21 for detailed
procedures.)
WARNING
Loss of pati ent hi story. Thi s menu shoul d rarel y be used
because pati ent hi stori es wi l l be l ost.
Service Mode menu options (Continued)
Configuration: Procedures
Procedures
Li sted bel ow are the pati ent moni tor setti ngs that can be confi gured.
Each procedure i s descri bed on the next pages.
From the Main Menu
Set pri nt l ocati ons on page 4-10
From Service Mode
Set Uni t Name on page 4-11
Set Bed Number on page 4-11
Pati ent-Moni tor Type on page 4-12
Admi t Menu on page 4-13
Confi rm or confi gure wi rel ess LAN on page 4-14
From Boot Code
Set Defi b Sync Vol tage and pul se wi dth on page 4-16
Set Li ne Frequency on page 4-16
Set CI C and QS protocol on page 4-17
Set MUSE system pr otocol on page 4-17
Transcutaneous Pace Bl ank Length on page 4-17
Set Country Sel ecti on on page 4-18
Set Language on page 4-18
Enabl e or di sabl e AFI B I denti fi cati on on page 4-19
Enabl e or di sabl e I ntel l i Rate on page 4-19
Anal og Out Buzz on page 4-20
Al so see Advanced user procedures on page 4-21 to
Set ti me and date on page 4-21
Transfer moni tor defaul ts on page 4-22
After compl eti ng al l necessary procedures, go to the Checkout on
page 8-1.
Configuration: Set print locations
Set print locations
NOTE
Dash pati ent moni tors and pri nters must be networked pri or to
setti ng l ocati ons.
Access the Manual Pri nt Locati on opti on as fol l ows.
1. Sel ect MORE MENUS >MONI TOR SETUP >PRI NT SETUP >
PRI NT LOCATI ON >MANUAL PRI NT LOCATI ON.
2. Usi ng the Trim Knob control , choose the manual pri nt l ocati on from
the l i st.
3. Sel ect PRI NT ON ALARM LOCATI ON.
4. Usi ng the Trim Knob control , choose the al arm pri nt l ocati on from
the l i st.
5. Sel ect PRI NT WI NDOW LOCATI ON.
6. Usi ng the Trim Knob control , choose the pri nt wi ndow l ocati on from
the l i st.
7. Sel ect 12 LEAD PRI NT LOCATI ON.
8. Usi ng the Trim Knob control , choose the 12 l ead pri nt l ocati on from
the l i st.
Configuration: Service Mode settings
Service Mode settings
From the Mai n Menu,
1. Sel ect MORE MENUS >MONI TOR SETUP >SERVI CE MODE.
2. Enter password usi ng the control to sel ect the day and month from
pati ent moni tor screen wi th l eadi ng zeros. (e.g. Jul y 4 = 0407)
Set Unit Name
Up to seven characters are used to i denti fy the care uni t. These
characters di spl ay at the top ri ght of the screen i mmedi atel y precedi ng
the bed number.
1. Enter Servi ce Mode (See Servi ce Mode setti ngs on page 4-11) and
sel ect MONI TOR SETTI NGS >UNI T NAME.
2. Use the Trim Knob control to sel ect and change each character. Up
to seven characters may be entered.
3. Sel ect SET UNI T NAME and press the Trim Knob control to exi t.
Set Bed Number
The bed number i denti fi es a parti cul ar pati ent bed. Up to fi ve characters
are used to i denti fy bed number. Thi s number di spl ays at the top ri ght of
the screen.
1. Enter servi ce mode (See Servi ce Mode setti ngs on page 4-11) and
sel ect MONI TOR SETTI NGS >UNI T NAME >SET BED
NUMBER.
2. Use the Trim Knob control to sel ect and change each character. Up
to fi ve characters may be entered.
3. Sel ect SET BED NUMBER and pr ess the Trim Knob control to exi t.

040A

041A
Patient-Monitor Type
The Pati ent-Moni tor Type sel ecti on determi nes the type of pati ent
moni tor desi red, e.g., adul t, neonatal or operati ng room. Di fferent al arms
and parameters are acti vated for each sel ecti on.
CAUTION
Each ti me the pati ent-moni tor type i s changed, the
ADMI T MENU functi on defaul ts to STANDARD
confi gurati on. Be aware that some pati ent al arms and
parameters may be changed.
NOTE
The keypad/remote control i s DI DCA programmed for speci fi c
pati ent moni tor types. The error message, WARNI NG: REMOTE
MI SMATCHED WI TH MONI TORI NG MODE di spl ays i f the
pati ent moni tor and keypad/remote control do not match.
sel ect PATI ENT-MONI TOR TYPE. Be sure to read the i nformati on
i n the Attenti on box before changi ng anythi ng.
2. Rotate Trim Knob control to sel ect the type of envi ronment the
pati ent moni tor wi l l be used i n.
3. Press Trim Knob control to exi t. Your sel ecti on di spl ays at the top
l eft of the screen after the date.

042A
Admit Menu
The Admi t Menu sel ecti on determi nes the functi on of the pati ent
moni tor. Before confi guri ng the Admi t Menu, you must know i f the
pati ent moni tor wi l l be used for standard adul t, neonatal , or operati ng
room moni tori ng, and i f the pati ent moni tor wi l l be moved from room to
room. Al l combi nati ons are expl ai ned bel ow.
STANDARDconfi gures the pati ent moni tor to stay i n one room for
stati onary moni tori ng onl y. Pati ent moni tors not connected to the
Uni ty Network (Ethernet connecti on) must use STANDARD
confi gurati on onl y.
ROVERconfi gures the pati ent moni tor to move from room to room
for stati onary moni tori ng onl y.
COMBOconfi gures the pati ent moni tor to stay i n one room for
both stati onary and ambul atory (tel emetry) moni tori ng. Thi s pati ent
moni tor di spl ays al l Tram modul e data combi ned wi th ECG data for
ambul atory pati ents.
NOTE
Users shoul d be aware of a possi bl e ti me di screpancy between
the waveforms from the Tel emetry devi ce and the waveforms
hard-wi red to the Dash pati ent moni tor. Users shoul d not
consi der these waveforms to be synchronous. I f absol ute
synchroni ci ty i s desi red, Combo mode shoul d be di sconti nued and
the ECG waveforms shoul d be acqui red vi a the hard-wi red
bedsi de pati ent moni tor.
ROVER COMBOconfi gures the pati ent moni tor to move from
room to room for both stati onary and ambul atory (tel emetry)
moni tori ng.
sel ect MENU SETUP >ADMI T MENU.
2. Use the Trim Knob control to sel ect the functi on of the pati ent
moni tor.
3. Press Trim Knob control to exi t.

513A
Confirm or configure wireless LAN
Confi rm or confi gure the opti onal wi rel ess LAN as fol l ows.
1. Enter Servi ce Mode (See Servi ce Mode setti ngs on page 4-11) and
sel ect MONI TOR SETTI NGS >CONFI GURE WI RELESS LAN.
2. Sel ect WI RELESS and set to ENABLED.
3. Sel ect and enter SSI D. I f you change the SSI D for TKI P, you must
enter the PASS KEY (even i f i t di dnt change) to recal cul ate the
PMK.
4. For 802.11b, sel ect and enter SECURI TY.
5. I f WEP, enter PASS KEY or hex key and KEY I NDEX to match the
confi gurati on on the access poi nt. (See the defi ni ti ons tabl e on the
fol l owi ng page.)
I f TKI P, enter PASS KEY. PMK i s cal cul ated and di spl ayed bel ow
the hex keys. Hex keys di spl ay al though not used by TKI P.
NOTE
Enteri ng a WEP hex key cl ears out the pass key.
The Hospi tal I T or a group that i s r esponsi bl e for the hospi tal 's
wi rel ess network can obtai n the SSI D and securi ty setti ngs
(type, pass key and key i ndex) for the 802.11b wi rel ess Dash.
Type i n the PASS KEY exactl y, usi ng no extra spaces. PASS
KEY entri es must be at l east 8 characters for TKI P. The message
TKI P KEY MUST BE AT LEAST 8 CHARACTERS di spl ays.
The SSI D and PASS KEY entri es are l i mi ted to 20 characters of
upper/l ower case l etters and numbers.
The SSI D and PASS KEY entri es are case sensi ti ve.
Do not use speci al characters or quotes.
933C
hex key index #1
hex key index #2
hex key index #3
hex key index #4
PMK calculation,
if TKIP
6. Sel ect PRI ORI TY. Set to NORMAL unl ess otherwi se speci fi ed by
the network speci al i st.
7. Manual l y reboot the Dash pati ent moni tor.
Term Definition
SSID SSID is an acronym for Service Set Identifier.The SSID is a sequence of
numbers and characters that represents the ID, a name, of the wireless
network. For the 802.11b wireless Dash to connect wirelessly, the SSID
from the wireless network must match the SSID of the 802.11b wireless
Dash. A 802.11b wireless Dash has a default SSID of rtGEHClinical.
SECURITY A 802.11b wireless Dash provides three levels of security: NONE, WEP
128 bit, WPA-PSK (TKIP).
NONE provides no security to the wireless communication
WEP 128 bit, Wired Equivalency Privacy, provides some level of
security, but it is less secure than WPA-PSK (TKIP).
WPA-PSK (TKIP), Temporal Key Integrity Protocol, is more secure than
WEP. TKIP has a method to change it's security key for each data
connection every second. For the 802.11b wireless Dash, WPA-PSK
(TKIP) is recommended.
PASS KEY Pass Key is equivalent to passphrase. This is a sequence of words for the
wireless Dash to connect to a security enabled wireless network, WEP
128 bit or WPA-PSK (TKIP). When WEP 128 bit security is selected, the
wireless Dash generates the 26 hex characters for four different keys,
displayed in four different rows (1st row represents a key index of one, 2nd
row for a key index of two, 3rd row for a key index of three and 4th row for
a key index of four). One of these keys needs to match the WEP 128
security setting in the access point for the wireless Dash to communicate
properly. When WPA-PSK (TKIP) is selected, the wireless Dash will not
generate the 26 hex characters. Pass Key or passphrase needs to match
the WPA-PSK (TKIP) setting in the access point in order for it to
communicate properly.
KEY INDEX (only required for WEP 128 bit)
When WEP 128 bit security is selected, the wireless Dash and the
wireless network need to share a same key index.
Configuration: Boot Code settings
Boot Code settings
To acti vate the Boot Code,
1. Wi th power on, hol d down NBP Go/Stop (or NBP Auto on Dash
5000) and ZERO ALL.
3. Keep holding NBP Go/Stop (or NBP Auto) and ZERO ALL unti l
the Boot Code i nformati on appears on the di spl ay.
Set Defib Sync Voltage and pulse width
The pati ent moni tor control s the anal og out si gnal used to tri gger a
defi bri l l ator. Refer to the defi bri l l ator manufacturers manual for the
requi red pul se ampl i tude and durati on.
Confi gure or change the Marker Out si gnal of the DEFIB SYNC
connector as fol l ows.
1. Acti vate Boot Code (Boot Code setti ngs on page 4-16) and sel ect
SET CONFI GURATI ON menu opti on.
2. I n the CONFI GURATI ON MENU, sel ect:
1 Defi b Sync Vol tage: and choose 5V or 12V ampl i tude.
2 Defi b Sync Pul se Wi dth: and choose 10 ms or 100 ms for
pul se durati on.
3. Sel ect Exi t and wai t for the pati ent moni tor to di spl ay the message,
Wri ti ng setti ngs to EEPROM...
4. Manual l y reboot the pati ent moni tor to i mpl ement thi s change.
Set Line Frequency
Confi gure or change the pati ent moni tor l i ne frequency to 50 or 60 Hz as
fol l ows. The defaul t i s 60 Hz.
2. Sel ect Li ne Frequency then choose 50 Hz or 60 Hz l i ne frequency.
Set CIC and QS protocol
The CI C and QS Protocol defaul t setti ng i s Seg50/51 (Segment 50/51)
and shoul d not be changed. However, future products may requi re
Hi l l top protocol . Use the Boot Code Servi ce Menu to change the CI C
Protocol and QS Protocol .
Set MUSE system protocol
The pati ent moni tor transmi ts 12SL and ACI -TI PI data over the opti onal
Uni ty Network to the MUSE System and ST Guard. The formats used for
thi s process are Hi l l top and Segment 50/51. Si nce the Segment 50/51
format does not support 500 Hz ECG data or ACI -TI PI , records ori gi nal l y
stored on the MUSE System i n Hi l l top format cannot di spl ay at the ST
Guard. The defaul t setti ng i s Hi l l top.
2. Sel ect MUSE System Protocol then choose Hi l l top or Seg50/51.
Hi l l topSends 12SL records to the MUSE System i n Hi l l top
format. The 12SL records contai n 500 sampl es per second of ECG
data. ST Guard wi l l not be abl e to retri eve 12SL records stored on
the MUSE System i n Hi l l top format.
Seg50/51Sends 12SL records to the MUSE System i n Segment
50/51 format wi th MAC Rhythm statements. The 12SL records
stored on the MUSE System contai n 240 sampl es per second of
ECG data. ST Guard can retri eve 12SL records from the MUSE
System. ACI -TI PI data can not be retri eved at the MUSE System
i f thi s protocol i s sel ected.
NOTE
Before you can transmi t data to the MUSE System and ST
Guard, you must set up the MUSE systems Locati on I D and Si te
Number.
Do not confi gure MUSE systems l ocati on at Si te 0. Si te 0
appears i nval i d to MUSE and any message comi ng from a devi ce
on Si te 0 i s dumped.
5. Refer to Servi ce Mode setti ngs on page 4-11 and sel ect MONI TOR
SETTI NGS > SET LOCATI ON, then sel ect SET SI TE NUMBER.
Transcutaneous Pace Blank Length
Thi s menu opti on i s reserved for future use and shoul d not be changed.
Set Country Selection
Sel ect DEFAULT or FRANCE to choose a parti cul ar set of GE factory
defaul ts.
2. Sel ect Country Sel ecti on and choose l anguage.
Set Language
Sel ect Set Language to change the l anguage of the di spl ayed text.
2. Sel ect the SET LANGUAGE menu opti on.
3. Sel ect the appropri ate l anguage.
4. Manual l y reboot the pati ent moni tor to di spl ay the new l anguage.
French language information
When the pati ent moni tor Local e (l anguage) i s set to French_France,
al arm pause durati on i s three mi nutes. Refer to the Al arms chapter i n
the operators manual .
Czech, Hungarian, Polish, or Russian language information
Speci al characters wi thi n al arm broadcasts, messages, pati ent name, si te
name, or l ocati on fi el ds that are sent over the opti onal Uni ty Network
cannot be di spl ayed by equi pment that does not support these l anguages.
Speci al characters may appear as ei ther bl anks, asteri sks, a seri es of
square boxes, or no character i s di spl ayed at al l because the abi l i ty to
di spl ay Cyri l l i c (Russi an al phabet) and speci al Czech, Hungari an, or
Pol i sh characters does not exi st on thi s equi pment.
Chinese and Japanese language information
When the pati ent moni tor Local e (l anguage) i s set to Chi nese or
Japanese, the fol l owi ng condi ti ons appl y:
Text for al arm broadcast over the opti onal network i s i n Engl i sh.
Al l text i nput i s i n Engl i sh onl y (e.g., text for uni t name, bed name,
pati ent i nformati on, and custom defaul t name).
Enable or disable AFIB Identification
NOTE
Thi s feature i s al ready enabl ed i f the Cardi ac software opti on i s
purchased.
Sel ect AFI B I denti fi cati on to enabl e or di sabl e the atri al fi bri l l ati on
detecti on feature.
To veri fy the opti on has been enabl ed on the pati ent moni tor,
1. Sel ect the fol l owi ng menu opti ons: MORE MENUS > MONI TOR
SETUP > SOFTWARE CONFI GURATI ON.
2. Veri fy that ATRI AL FI B i s l i sted under ENABLED SOFTWARE
OPTI ONS.
To change the status of thi s feature,
2. Sel ect the AFI B I denti fi cati on menu opti on.
3. Sel ect enabl ed to acti vate thi s opti on, or di sabl ed to deacti vate thi s
opti on.
6. Refer to the operators manual to confi gure the pati ent moni tor to
use thi s feature.
Enable or disable IntelliRate
I ntel l i Rate heart rate cal cul ati on feature i s enabl ed from the factory.
To veri fy the opti on has been enabl ed on the pati ent moni tor,
1. Sel ect the fol l owi ng menu opti ons: MORE MENUS > MONI TOR
SETUP > SOFTWARE CONFI GURATI ON.
2. Veri fy that ECG I NTELLI RATE i s l i sted under ENABLED
SOFTWARE OPTI ONS.
To change the status of thi s feature,
2. Sel ect the I ntel l i Rate menu opti on.
3. Sel ect enabl ed to acti vate thi s opti on, or di sabl ed to deacti vate thi s
opti on.
6. Refer to the operators manual to confi gure the pati ent moni tor to
use thi s feature.
Analog Out Buzz
Sel ect Anal og Out Buzz to i denti fy an ECG or an i nvasi ve BP l eads off
condi ti on vi a a supported anal og out devi ce. The defaul t i s 0 vol ts.
2. Sel ect the Anal og Out Buzz menu opti on.
3. Sel ect 60Hz si ne wave to di spl ay a 60 Hz si ne wave, or sel ect 0 vol ts
to di spl ay a fl at l i ne.
4. Sel ect Exi t and wai t for the pati ent moni tor to di spl ay the
message, Wri ti ng setti ngs to EEPROM...
Completion
The pati ent moni tor i s now ready for normal operati on. At thi s ti me,
perform procedures i n Checkout on page 8-1.
Configuration: Advanced user procedures
Advanced user procedures
The fol l owi ng procedures are for advanced users onl y. These procedures
shoul d rarel y be used, and onl y experi enced techni ci ans shoul d proceed.
Procedures
The fol l owi ng procedures are di scussed i n thi s chapter.
Set ti me and date
Transfer moni tor defaul ts
Set time and date
Change the ti me onl y when the system i s swi tched to or from dayl i ght
savi ngs ti me.
NOTE
When a pati ent moni tor i s fi rst connected to the opti onal Uni ty
Network, the ti me and date i s automati cal l y updated from the
network ti me.
WARNING
Loss of pati ent data hi story. Changi ng the ti me or date
setti ngs may resul t i n the l oss of pati ent data hi story. I f
one pati ent moni tors ti me or date i s changed, al l pati ent
moni tors on the network l i sten and fol l ow sui t wi thi n 3-
5 seconds. Changi ng the ti me base of one pati ent moni tor
may cause some l oss of pati ent data hi story for al l the
pati ent moni tors on the network.
The fol l owi ng procedure expl ai ns how to use the TI ME AND DATE
opti on i n the pati ent moni tor SERVI CE MODE menu.
1. Access the TI ME AND DATE menu starti ng from the Mai n Menu.
Sel ect MORE MENUS >MONI TOR SETUP >SERVI CE MODE.
0407)
3. Sel ect SET TI ME and use the Trim Knob control to change the
ti me. The ti me di spl ays as a 24-hour mi l i tary cl ock.
4. Sel ect SET DATE and use the Trim Knob control to change the
date.
Transfer monitor defaults
NOTE
Transfer Moni tor Defaul ts feature i s part of the Uni ty Network
software opti on and i s avai l abl e i n software versi on 3 or l ater. You
must purchase and enabl e thi s software opti on before you can
transfer pati ent moni tor defaul ts.
The pati ent moni tor defaul ts set on one pati ent moni tor (server) may be
transferred to another pati ent moni tor (cl i ent), provi ded that the cl i ent
pati ent moni tor shares the fol l owi ng:
the same software revi si on (versi on),
the same pati ent-moni tor type (e.g., ADULT, NEO, or OR),
the same wi rel ess LAN confi gurati on (i f appl i cabl e),
the same software package (e.g., Basi c, Cardi ac, Cardi opul monary),
and
the same country code (e.g., Defaul t or France).
The fol l owi ng defaul ts transfer when usi ng thi s feature:
al l pati ent moni tor defaul ts
wi rel ess LAN confi gurati on (i f appl i cabl e)
custom defaul t names
12 SL l ocati on
12 SL si te
Store monitor defaults for transfer
To transfer moni tor defaul ts, they must be set, then stored on the pati ent
moni tor that i s used as the server.
1. At the server pati ent moni tor, set up the moni tor defaul ts you want
to store. Refer to the fol l owi ng secti ons of the operators manual for
reference:
Defaul ts Worksheet l ocated i n the preface of the manual . These
are bl ank and al l ow you to enter your own defaul t setti ngs.
Moni tor Setup chapter.
Adul t I CU, Neonatal I CU, Operati ng Mode Factory Defaul t
Appendi ces.
2. When defaul ts are set, start from the Mai n Menu and sel ect MORE
MENUS >MONI TOR SETUP >SERVI CE MODE.
0407)
4. Sel ect MONI TOR SETTI NGS.
5. Sel ect STORE DEFAULTS FOR NETWORK TRANSFER.
6. Sel ect YES to the confi rmati on popup menu.
Copy stored monitor defaults
WARNING
Loss of Defaul ts. Copyi ng pati ent moni tor defaul ts from
the server pati ent moni tor erases al l of the pati ent
moni tor defaul ts on the cl i ent pati ent moni tor.
To copy pati ent moni tor defaul ts from the server pati ent moni tor, the
cl i ent pati ent moni tor must be i n the Di scharged state. I f the cl i ent
pati ent moni tor i s set to the OR pati ent-moni tor type, i t must not be i n
Combo or Rover Combo Admi t mode.
NOTE
Make sure that the cl i ent pati ent moni tor shares the same
confi gurati on as the server pati ent moni tor. Refer to Transfer
moni tor defaul ts on page 4-22.
1. At the cl i ent pati ent moni tor, start from the Mai n Menu and sel ect
MORE MENUS >MONI TOR SETUP >SERVI CE MODE.
0407)
3. Sel ect COPY UNI T DEFAULTS.
4. Sel ect SELECT UNI T TO COPY MONI TOR DEFAULTS FROM.
5. From the l i st of uni ts on the Uni ty Network, choose the uni t the
server pati ent moni tor i s i n.
6. Sel ect SELECT BED TO COPY MONI TOR DEFAULTS FROM.
7. Scrol l through the l i st of beds wi thi n the sel ected uni t unti l the
desi red server pati ent moni tor i s found. Sel ect i t, and answer YES to
the confi rmati on popup menu.
NOTE
After copyi ng pati ent moni tor defaul ts, the fi rst set of defaul ts i s
automati cal l y acti vated. I f another set of defaul ts i s desi red, the user
must manual l y sel ect i t from the Recal l Defaul ts menu.
Wi rel ess LAN confi gurati on setti ngs that are transferred do not take
effect unti l the pati ent moni tor i s rebooted.
After copyi ng pati ent moni tor defaul ts from another bed (the server
pati ent moni tor), veri fy that the defaul ts were transferred and
arrhythmi a l evel s are as desi red. See Moni tor defaul ts transfer on
page 6-11 for troubl eshooti ng any errors duri ng thi s process.
5 Maintenance
Maintenance: Maintenance schedule
Maintenance schedule
WARNING
Fai l ure on the part of al l responsi bl e i ndi vi dual s,
hospi tal s or i nsti tuti ons, empl oyi ng the use of thi s devi ce,
to i mpl ement the recommended mai ntenance schedul e
may cause equi pment fai l ure and possi bl e heal th
hazards. The manufacturer does not, i n any manner,
assume the responsi bi l i ty for performi ng the
recommended mai ntenance schedul e, unl ess an
Equi pment Mai ntenance Agreement exi sts. The sol e
responsi bi l i ty rests wi th the i ndi vi dual s, hospi tal s, or
i nsti tuti ons uti l i zi ng the devi ce.
To ensure the pati ent moni tor i s al ways functi onal when requi red,
qual i fi ed servi ce personnel shoul d perform the fol l owi ng regul ar
mai ntenance. For a detai l ed checkl i st of al l mai ntenance i tems, go to
Mai ntenance and checkout checkl i st on page 8-3.
Vi sual i nspecti on on page 5-3Perform a vi sual i nspecti on upon
recei pt of the equi pment, every 12 months thereafter, and pri or to
servi ci ng the uni t.
Cl eani ng and di si nfecti ng the pati ent moni tor on page 5-3Cl ean
the uni t upon recei pt of the equi pment, every 12 months thereafter,
and each ti me the uni t i s servi ced. Cl ean the pri nt head every 12
months or as usage demands.
Battery mai ntenance on page 5-10Condi ti on the batteri es once
every si x months or as needed.
Cl ear the stored pati ent data memory on page 5-16Admi t and
di scharge a test pati ent every 12 months to cl ear the pati ent
moni tors stored pati ent data memory.
Checkout on page 8-1Perform el ectri cal safety tests, checkout
procedures and cal i brati on upon recei pt of the equi pment, every 12
months thereafter, and each ti me the uni t i s servi ced.
Cal i brate the NBP software upon recei pt of the equi pment, every
12 months thereafter, and each ti me the uni t i s opened for
ser vi ce. Cal i brate the anal og output BP and anal og output ECG
whenever these do NOT pass the anal og output checkout
procedure.
Cal i brate the Mai nstream End-ti dal CO
2
upon recei pt of the
equi pment, every 12 months thereafter, and each ti me the
adapter i s removed or repl aced. Refer to the CO
2
chapter of the
Dash 3000/4000/5000 Pati ent Moni tor Operators Manual .
Cal i brate the Si destream End-ti dal CO
2
accordi ng to the
documentati on that came wi th the CO
2
modul e.
Maintenance: Visual inspection
Visual inspection
The pati ent moni tor and i ts components shoul d be careful l y i nspected
pri or to i nstal l ati on, once every 12 months thereafter and each ti me the
equi pment i s servi ced.
Careful l y i nspect the equi pment for physi cal damage to the case, the
di spl ay screen, and the keypad. Do not use the pati ent moni tor i f
damage i s determi ned. Refer damaged equi pment to qual i fi ed servi ce
personnel .
I nspect al l external connecti ons for l oose connectors or frayed cabl es.
Have any damaged connectors or cabl es repl aced by qual i fi ed servi ce
personnel .
I nspect the di spl ay face for marks, scratches, or other damage.
Physi cal damage to a fl at panel di spl ay gl ass may pose an i mpl osi on
hazard. Have the fl at panel di spl ay repl aced by qual i fi ed servi ce
personnel i f necessary.
Safety l abel s and i nscri pti on on the devi ce are cl earl y l egi bl e.
Cleaning and disinfecting the patient monitor
WARNING
Di sconnect AC-powered equi pment from the power l i ne
before cl eani ng or di si nfecti ng i ts surface. Turn off the
power to battery-powered equi pment before cl eani ng or
di si nfecti ng i ts surface.
Procedure
NOTE
Clean the exterior surface on a regular basis in compliance with your
institutions infection control and biomedical engineering department.
Complete the following procedure to clean the exterior surfaces of this equipment:
1. For cleaning all displays, including touchscreen and standard displays, do the
following:
a. Turn off the power to the touchscreen and standard displays before you
start cleaning the displays.
b. Wipe the exterior with a soft lint-free cloth, lightly moistened with
household glass cleaner.
2. For cleaning and disinfecting the equipment, wipe the exterior with a soft lint-
free cloth, using the following solution as recommended in the APIC
Guidelines for Selection and Use of Disinfectants (1996):
Sodium hypochlorite (5.2% household bleach) minimum 1:500 dilution
(minimum 100 ppm free chlorine) and a maximum 1:10 dilution.
Maintenance: Cleaning and disinfecting the patient monitor
Any sodium hypochlorite wipe product that meets the above guidelines can
be used.
NOTE
Wring excess disinfectant from wipe before using.
NOTE
Any contact of the disinfectant solutions with metal parts may cause
corrosion.
3. When disinfecting the equipment, allow disinfectant solution to remain on
device for a minimum of one minute per hospital guidelines.
4. Wipe off cleaning solutions with a clean, lightly moistened cloth.
5. Dry thoroughly with a dry lint-free cloth and let air dry for at least 30 minutes.
NOTE
Drying times may vary based on the environmental conditions.
6. Take care not to let fluid pool around connection pins. If this should happen,
blot dry with a soft lint-free cloth.
Cautions
Use the following precautions to prevent damaging the equipment:
Never immerse the device in any liquid.
Do not pour or spray any liquid directly on the device or permit fluid to seep
into connections or openings.
Never use conductive solutions, solutions that contain chlorides, wax, or wax
compounds to clean the device.
Never use solutions or products that contain the following:
Any type of Ammonium Chloride such as, but not limited to Dimethyl
Benzyl Ammonium Chloride and Quaternary Ammonium Chloride
solutions.
Abrasive cleaners or solvents of any kind.
Acetone
Ketone
Betadine
Alcohol-based cleaning agents
Sodium salts
Never autoclave or steam clean the device.
Always use household glass cleaner to clean the touchscreen or standard
displays.
Impact or results of improper cleaning products and processes
The following consequences can occur if you do not follow the cautionary
guidelines when cleaning the equipment:
Product discoloration.
Melting, dulling, or distorting of the device case.
Brittle and breaking device case.
Blurring the lettering on label text.
Equipment malfunction or failure.
Void warranty.
Cleaning products to avoid
Cleaning products known to cause the types of problems listed previously include,
but are not limited to:
Sani-Cloth
Wipes
Ascepti Wipes
HB Quat
Clorox Wipes (they do not contain bleach)
Over-the-counter detergents (e.g., Fantastic, Tilex, etc.)
Products that contain active ingredients and solutions similar to these products
should be avoided.
Storage
Al ways remove batteri es when the devi ce i s not i n use (even for short
peri ods of ti me).
Store i n a dry wel l -venti l ated area.
Clean the print head
Heavy usage causes debri s to bui l d up on the pri nt head. Thi s bui l d can
cause the pri nted i mages to appear di storted. I t i s recommended that
thi s procedure be performed when necessary, dependi ng on usage.
Materials required
A nonabrasi ve materi al /cl oth and i sopropyl al cohol are al l that are
necessary to perform thi s procedure.
Procedure
1. Di sconnect the power cord from the mai ns source.
2. Open the wri ter door to expose the pri nt head.
3. Remove paper rol l .
4. Locate pri nt head shown i n the fi gure above. A fl ashl i ght may hel p
i l l umi nate the pri nt head for cl oser exami nati on.
5. Wi pe the pri nt head wi th al cohol and a nonabrasi ve materi al /cotton
swab i n an si de to si de moti on. Conti nue wi pi ng unti l the cl oth/swab
wi pes cl ean.
6. Wi pe paper dri ve rol l er cl ean of any bi ts of paper and debri s wi th
al cohol and a nonabrasi ve materi al .
print head
paper drive roller
594A
Maintenance: Cleaning, disinfecting and storing GE ECG cables and leadwires
Cleaning, disinfecting and storing GE ECG cables
and leadwires
Cleaning and disinfecting
1. Remove cabl es and l eadwi res from the handhel d devi ce or system
before cl eani ng.
2. Use care i n cl eani ng l eadwi res to prevent pul l i ng the l ong wi res from
the connector ends. Metal connecti ons can be pul l ed away from the
connectors.
3. For general cl eani ng of cabl es and l eadwi res, wi pe usi ng a l i ghtl y
moi stened cl oth wi th a mi l d soap and water sol uti on. Then wi pe and
ai r dry.
4. For di si nfecti ng the cabl es and l eadwi res, wi pe exteri or wi th a soft
l i nt-free cl oth, usi ng the fol l owi ng sol uti on as recommended i n the
API C Gui del i nes for Sel ecti on and Use of Di si nfectants (1996):
Sodi um hypochl ori te (5.2% househol d bl each) mi ni mum 1:500
di l uti on (mi ni mum 100 ppm free chl ori ne) and maxi mum 1:10
di l uti on.
Any sodi um hypochl ori te wi pe product that meets the above
gui del i nes can be used.
NOTE
Wri ng excess di si nfectant from wi pe before usi ng.
NOTE
Any contact of di si nfectant sol uti ons wi th metal parts may cause
corrosi on.
5. Do not i mmerse ei ther end of a cabl e or l eadwi re connector.
I mmersi ng or soaki ng the connector ends may corrode metal
contact ends and affect si gnal qual i ty.
6. Wi pe off cl eani ng sol uti ons wi th a cl ean, l i ghtl y moi stened cl oth.
7. Dry thoroughl y wi th a dry, l i nt-free cl oth and l et ai r dry for at l east
30 mi nutes.
NOTE
Dryi ng ti mes may vary based on the envi ronmental condi ti ons.
8. Take care not to l et fl ui d pool around connecti on pi ns. I f thi s shoul d
happen, bl ot dry wi th a soft, l i nt-free cl oth.
9. Do not use excessi ve dryi ng techni ques, such as oven, forced heat or
sun dryi ng.
Sterilization
NOTE
EtO steri l i zati on i s not recommended, but may be requi red for cabl es
and l eadwi res. Frequent steri l i zati on wi l l reduce the useful l i fe of
Maintenance: Cleaning, disinfecting and storing GE ECG cables and leadwires
cabl es and l eadwi res.
Steri l i ze wi th ethyl ene oxi de gas (EtO) at a maxi mum temperature of 50
C/122 F. After EtO steri l i zati on, fol l ow the recommendati ons from the
steri l i zer manufacturer for requi red aerati on.
Cautions
Never i mmerse the handhel d devi ce, cabl es, or l eadwi res i n any
l i qui d.
Do not pour or spray any l i qui d di rectl y on cabl es or l eadwi res or
permi t fl ui d to seep i nto connecti ons or openi ngs.
Never use conducti ve sol uti ons, sol uti ons that contai n chl ori des, wax,
or wax compounds to cl ean handhel d devi ces, cabl es or l eadwi res.
Never use sol uti ons or products that contai n the fol l owi ng:
Any type of Ammoni um Chl ori de such as, but not l i mi ted to:
Di methyl Benzyl Ammoni um Chl ori de or Quaternary
Ammoni um Chl ori de sol uti ons
Abrasi ve cl eaners or sol vents of any ki nd
Acetone
Ketone
Betadi ne
Al cohol -based cl eani ng agents
Sodi um sal ts
Never autocl ave or steam cl ean cabl es or l eadwi res.
Storage
Store i n a dry wel l -venti l ated area.
Verti cal l y hang cabl es and l eadwi res.
Do not coi l l eadwi res or cabl es ti ghtl y around any medi cal devi ce.
Improper cleaning products and processes impact or results
Product di scol orati on
Metal part corrosi on
Bri ttl e wi res
Bri ttl e and breaki ng connectors
Reduced cabl es and l eadwi res l i fe
Uni t mal functi on
Voi d warranty
Cleaning products to avoid
Cl eani ng products known to cause the types of probl ems l i sted above
i ncl ude, but are not l i mi ted to:
Sani -Cl othWi pes
Maintenance: Cleaning other applied parts
Ascepti Wi pes
HB Quat
Cl oroxWi pes (they do not contai n bl each)
Over-the-counter detergents (e.g., Fantasti c, Ti l ex, etc.)
Products that contai n acti ve i ngredi ents and sol uti ons si mi l ar to these
products shoul d al so be avoi ded.
Cleaning other applied parts
For other appl i ed parts such as temperature sensors, catheters, pul se
oxi metry probes, and NBP cuffs, you must consul t the manufacturer for
cl eani ng, steri l i zati on, or di si nfecti ng method
Maintenance: Battery maintenance
Battery maintenance
How to charge the battery
The battery can be charged by one of two methods:
Outsi de of a pati ent moni tor by usi ng the Cadex SMart Two+
charger.
I nsi de a pati ent moni tor that i s connected to an AC power source.
NOTE
To extend the l i fe of the battery, GE recommends that you charge
the battery usi ng the external Cadex SMart Two+ charger.
Charging the battery with a Cadex SMart Two+ charger
1. I nsert the battery i nto the battery charger. The RUN LED l i ghts.
2. Leave the battery i n the battery charger unti l the READY LED
l i ghts.
NOTE
I f the FAIL LED l i ghts, remove the battery from the battery
charger and rei nsert i t. Thi s shoul d correct any battery charger
ti me out errors. However, i f thi s does not correct the battery
charger ti me out errors, then the battery i s defecti ve and shoul d
be repl aced.
Charging the battery inside a patient monitor
NOTE
Non-recommended (i ncompati bl e) batteri es wi l l not charge i n the
Dash pati ent moni tor.
The battery i s charged whenever the pati ent moni tor i s connected to an
AC power source.
When you store the battery i nsi de of a pati ent moni tor that i s connected
to an AC power source (a state known as fl oati ng), the battery wi l l sel f-
di scharge to l ess than 90% of i ts Ful l Charge Capaci ty after
approxi matel y two weeks (dependi ng upon the temperature of the
battery). At thi s ti me, the pati ent moni tor wi l l automati cal l y recharge
the battery to 100% of i ts Ful l Charge Capaci ty.
How to condition the battery
The battery can be condi ti oned by one of two methods:
charger.
NOTE
To extend the l i fe of the battery, GE recommends that you condi ti on
the battery usi ng the external Cadex SMart Two+ charger.
Conditioning the battery with a Cadex SMart Two+ charger
A condi ti oni ng cycl e usi ng the battery charger requi res approxi matel y
ni ne hours to compl ete. Compl ete the fol l owi ng steps to automati cal l y
condi ti on the battery.
1. I nsert the battery i nto the battery charger.
2. Press the CONDITION button when one of the fol l owi ng condi ti ons
occur:
Whi l e the RUN LED l i ght i s sti l l fl ashi ng.
Whi l e the CONDITION LED i s fl ashi ng.
3. Remove the battery from the battery charger when the RUN LED
l i ghts. Thi s compl etes the condi ti oni ng cycl e.
Conditioning the battery inside a patient monitor
NOTE
Non-recommended (i ncompati bl e) batteri es wi l l not condi ti on i n the
WARNING
PATI ENT RI SK HAZARD Never condi ti on a battery
whi l e the pati ent moni tor i s connected to a pati ent.
Seri ous i njury or death coul d resul t.
Compl ete the fol l owi ng steps to manual l y condi ti on the battery usi ng the
pati ent moni tor:
1. Remove al l batteri es from the pati ent moni tor.
2. I nsert one battery i nto Sl ot A of the pati ent moni tor.
3. Di sconnect the pati ent moni tor from the AC power source.
4. Access the pati ent moni tors Battery Status wi ndow to moni tor the
batterys Charge Level . See I denti fy battery status usi ng the
BATTERY STATUS menu on page 2-38.
5. Al l ow the battery to di scharge to l ess than a 90% Charge Level .
6. Re-connect the pati ent moni tor to the AC power source and ful l y
charge the battery.
7. Di sconnect the pati ent moni tor from the AC power source and al l ow
the pati ent moni tor to run unti l i t di spl ays the BATTERY LOW
message, or unti l the pati ent moni tor shuts down.
8. Re-connect the pati ent moni tor to the AC power source. Al l ow the
battery to ful l y charge to compl ete the condi ti oni ng cycl e.
How to store the battery
Condi ti on the battery before stori ng i t. Condi ti oni ng the battery to
100% capaci ty i ncreases the storage shel f-l i fe of the battery.
Store the battery outsi de of the pati ent moni tor at a temper ature
between 20C to 25C (68F to 77F).
When the battery i s stor ed i nsi de a pati ent moni tor that i s
powered by an AC power source, the battery cel l temperature
i ncreases by 10C to 15C (18F to 27F) above the rooms
ambi ent temperatur e. Thi s r educes the l i fe of the batter y.
When the battery i s stor ed i nsi de a pati ent moni tor that i s
conti nuousl y powered by an AC power source and i s not powered
by battery on a regul ar basi s, the l i fe of the battery may be l ess
than 12 months. GE recommends that you remove the battery
and store i t near the pati ent moni tor unti l i t i s needed for
transport.
Re-condi ti on a stored battery every si x months to i ncrease the
storage shel f-l i fe.
How to wake up the battery
When the battery i s stor ed for a l ong per i od of ti me wi thout bei ng
charged, i t wi l l eventual l y l ose al l of i ts charge and fal l asl eep. When
the battery i s asl eep, none of the LEDs on the battery wi l l i l l umi nate
when the batterys on/off button i s pressed. You must wake up the
battery before you can use i t agai n.
Ther e are two methods to wake up the battery:
charger.
Waking up the battery with a Cadex SMart Two+ charger
NOTE
A deep di scharged battery wi l l requi re you to repeat the fol l owi ng
steps more than once before the battery wi l l wake up.
1. I nsert the battery i nto the battery charger and wai t for the RUN
LED l i ght to i l l umi nate (approxi matel y three mi nutes).
2. I f the RUN LED l i ght does NOT i l l umi nate, compl ete the fol l owi ng
steps:
a. Remove the battery from the battery charger.
b. Re-i nsert the battery i nto the battery charger and l et the battery
tri ckl e charge for two to three mi nutes whi l e the FAIL LED
fl ashes. (I f the RUN LED l i ght l i ghts, i gnore i t.)
c. Watch the battery charger LEDs and i mmedi atel y remove the
battery from the battery charger when the FAIL LED stops
fl ashi ng and remai ns i l l umi nated, or when both the RUN and
CONDITION LEDs fl ash.
d. Wai t for one to two seconds, then re-i nsert the battery i nto the
battery charger. The RUN and CONDITION LEDs wi l l fl ash for
fi ve to ten seconds whi l e the charger i ni ti al i zes the battery. I f the
FAIL LED l i ghts, remove the battery and re-i nsert i t i nto the
battery charger.
e. Watch the battery charger LEDs. The RUN LED shoul d stop
fl ashi ng and remai n i l l umi nated for approxi matel y one mi nute
l ater the CONDITION LED shoul d stop fl ashi ng. At thi s ti me,
the battery i s awake and bei ng charged.
Waking up the battery with a patient monitor
NOTE
Non-recommended (i ncompati bl e) batteri es wi l l not wake up the
1. Connect the pati ent moni tor to an AC power source.
2. Acti vate the Boot Loader program.
a. Hol d down NBP Go/Stop (or NBP Auto on Dash 5000) and
ZERO ALL (FUNCTION).
b. Press and rel ease the Trim Knob control .
c. Keep holding NBP Go/Stop (or NBP Auto) and ZERO ALL
(FUNCTION) unti l the Boot Code i nformati on appears on the
di spl ay.
3. Sel ect Wake Up Battery from the Servi ce Menu.
4. I nsert the sl eepi ng battery i nto sl ot A of the pati ent moni tor.
NOTE
I n some l anguages, sl ot A i s i denti fi ed as sl ot 1 and sl ot B i s
i denti fi ed as sl ot 2.
5. Sel ect Wake Up Li thi um I on Battery i n SLOT A. Then, the
pati ent moni tor appl i es a wake-up shot of current for up to 210
seconds.
6. Watch for the message, Battery awake, run mai n code to charge.
The battery shoul d now be awake.
I f the Battery awake, run mai n code to charge message
appears but the battery i s NOT awake, the battery may be i n a
deep di scharge state. You shoul d repeat step 5 at l east four more
ti mes to gi ve the battery addi ti onal wake-up shots of current.
7. Qui ckl y reboot (or power cycl e) the pati ent moni tor to begi n chargi ng
the batteri es. The pati ent moni tors i l l umi nated yel l ow-col ored
CHARGING STATUS LED i ndi cates that the battery i s bei ng
charged.
NOTE
The pati ent moni tor wi l l not charge the battery whi l e i t i s
runni ng the Boot Loader program.
How to replace the batteries
WARNING
EXPLOSI ON OR FI RE Usi ng non-recommended
batteri es coul d resul t i n i njury/burns to the pati ent or
users.
Onl y use batteri es recommended or manufactured by GE.
The warranty can be voi ded i f non-recommended
batteri es are used.
1. Open the battery doors on the l eft si de of the pati ent moni tor, al ong
the bottom.
2. Remove the faul ty batteri es.
NOTE
Dependi ng on your model , the battery compartment may be a
si ngl e pl asti c door or two si l i cone doors.
3. Repl ace wi th a new battery. The pati ent moni tor supports up to two
exchangeabl e l i thi um-i on batteri es. I nstal l the battery wi th the
connecti on pi ns faci ng down and i nserted fi rst.
4. Cl ose the battery cover s.
5. Veri fy that the pati ent moni tor operates correctl y.
a. Confi rm that the Battery I Ds wi th a battery i con di spl ays i n the
l ower ri ght corner of the pati ent moni tor.
b. Veri fy that the Battery LEDS i l l umi nate ei ther green or amber.
581B
635A
Rechargeable battery recycling
When the battery no l onger hol ds a charge, i t shoul d be repl aced. The
battery i s recycl eabl e. Remove the ol d battery from the pati ent moni tor
and fol l ow your l ocal recycl i ng gui del i nes.
WARNING
EXPLOSI ON HAZARD Do not i nci nerate the battery
or store at hi gh temperatures. Seri ous i njury or death
coul d resul t.
I n the Uni ted States and Canada, the Rechargeabl e Battery Recycl i ng
Corporati on (RBRC) can hel p you l ocate your nearest rechargeabl e
battery col l ecti on si te. You can contact RBRC by tel ephone or by
accessi ng thei r i nternet web si te.
tel ephone: 1-800-8-BATTERY (800-822-88379)
i nternet address: www.rbrc.org
About the Cadex SMart Two+ charger
Battery charger LED indicators
The fol l owi ng i s a qui ck gui de whi ch i denti fi es the meani ng of the
charger LEDs.
Equipment software requirements
The pati ent moni tor must use Dash 3000/4000 software versi on 2A or
l ater.
The Cadex SMart Two+ charger must use software versi on 1.31 or
l ater.
LED indicators Illuminated Flashing
RUN Charging in progress. Initializing the battery.
RUN and CONDITION Conditioning in progress.
READY Charging is complete.
READY and CONDITION Conditioning is complete
pass target.
Conditioning is required.
FAIL Battery fault. Charger fault.
FAIL and CONDITION Conditioning is complete
fail target.
Maintenance: Clear the stored patient data memory
Clear the stored patient data memory
Admi t and di scharge a test pati ent every 12 months to cl ear the pati ent
moni tors stored pati ent data memory.
6 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting: Fault analysis
Fault analysis
Overview
The symptoms and sol uti ons i n thi s chapter represent onl y a few of the
faul ts that you may encounter and are not i ntended to cover every
possi bl e probl em that may occur.
A systemati c approach to the di agnosi s of probl ems as wel l as a general
understandi ng of the archi tecture, both hardware and software, of the
pati ent moni tor are essenti al to ensure successful troubl eshooti ng of a
devi ce. GE recommends formal servi ce trai ni ng before repai rs are
attempted. These troubl eshooti ng procedures combi ned wi th trai ni ng
provi de the servi ce techni ci an wi th ski l l s necessary to servi ce and repai r
a pati ent moni tor i n the event of a mal functi on.
Required tools or equipment
Standard set of hand tool s
Pati ent si mul ator wi th cabl es
Di gi tal mul ti meter
Problems
Before starti ng any detai l ed troubl eshooti ng, compl ete a thorough vi sual
i nspecti on of the fol l owi ng.
Al l cabl e connecti ons secure?
Devi ces properl y powered?
Connected to a proper power source?
Problem Possible reason Solution
General
The unit is plugged in, but it does not
switch to AC from battery power.
The output voltage of the power
supply is inadequate for the
processor PCB to recognize.
Perform Power outlet test on page 8-6 to confirm
AC power.
Replace the power supply.
Replace the processor/power management
assembly.
Alarm audio
Audio does not sound.
Go to the Alarm Help Menu and select
Crisis. Listen for the three-beep
audio.
The speaker cable is loose or
disconnected.
Restore the cable connections.
The speaker failed. Replace the speaker.
The audio circuit on the processor
PCB failed.
Replace the Replace the processor/power
management assembly.
Waveform display
Patient cables are bad.
The acquisition PCB, DAS Assembly
or power supply PCB failed.
Perform appropriate sections of the Data acquisition
tests on page 8-53 depending on the waveform
problem.
Optional writer
No paper comes out, even though
Graphing is displayed.
Graph locations are set incorrectly. With the Trim Knob control, select MONITOR
GRAPH SETUP, and GRAPH LOCATION. Verify
that MANUAL, ALARM, and PRINT locations are
set properly.
Paper comes out, but no graph data is
shown.
The paper may be loaded
incorrectly.
Refer to the Operator Manual for correct paper
installation.
Print head may be dirty or defective. Clean the printhead. Refer to Clean the print head
on page 5-6
Perform a graph test. If problem persists, replace the
writer assembly.
Saving Message Writer is busy. When the graph is complete, the saved graph prints
out.
Writer is no longer available. Check the graph locations. Set the correct graph
locations if necessary.
Missing segments in the graph data. Print head may be dirty or defective. Clean the printhead. Refer to Clean the print head
on page 5-6
Perform a graph test. If problem persists, replace the
writer assembly.
Optional wireless connection
Intermittent or no waveform. Network connection bad, wireless
not enabled, wireless card not
communicating with access point.
Outside coverage area.
NOTE: There is no alarm or displayed indicator if Dash
is outside the wireless coverage area.
Perform procedures in Wireless LAN on page 6-24.
The red or yellow lights do not light on
boot up of the patient monitor.
Cable may be loose or
disconnected.
Restore the connection.
LEDs are burned out. Replace the alarm light assembly or PCB.
Defib Sync
Buzz signal comes out for ECG or
BP.
BP is not zeroed. Zero out the BP.
BP is not available. Plug in a BP cable.
ECG leads fail. Check patient connections.
Video display
There are bars/strips of pixels missing
on the display in rows/columns. Or
only one row/column of pixels on the
display is missing or never turned on.
The remaining portion of the display
functions properly.
Possible burned-out pixels. Run the display tests in the boot loader.
Replace the display assembly.
No display Display may be in standby mode.
Backlight inverted may be defective.
Press the POWER button. If display still does not
appear within 20 seconds, replace the display
assembly.
Replace back light inverter.
Acquisition PCB symptoms
Symptoms rel ati ve to pati ent si gnal acqui si ti on such as mi ssi ng
parameter text and waveform(s) may be associ ated wi th acqui si ti on PCB
fai l ure. I t i s i mportant that you are abl e to di sti ngui sh the di fference
between the general format of the di spl ay, whi ch i s generated by the
processor PCB, versus the pati ent si gnal s and data that i s associ ated
wi th these pati ent si gnal s, a functi on of data acqui si ti on, whi ch i s
generated by the acqui si ti on PCB.
Processor PCB symptoms
Symptoms wi th battery operati on, network communi cati ons,
asynchronous communi cati ons, NBP control , PCMCI A communi cati ons,
anal og output, audi o/sound generati on, and vi deo si gnal s as wel l as other
di spl ay-rel ated probl ems al l may be associ ated wi th processor PCB
fai l ure. Al l of these are functi ons control l ed by mi crocontrol l er or
graphi cs processi ng ci rcui try l ocated on the Processor/Power
Management PCB.
Network connector
No network connection when a
network cable is connected to the
patient monitors Network Connector.
The Dash patient monitor is
connected to a Dash Port docking
station. The patient monitors
Network Connector is inactive when
it is connected to the docking
station.
Network is disabled in boot code.
Connect the network cable to the docking stations
internet connector.
Enable network in boot code.
The Dash patient monitor does not
have the optional Unity Network
option enabled.
Purchase and enable the Unity Network option.
Remote control
The remote control does not activate
the display.
Cable or Autoport to Mport adapter
connections may be loose.
Restore the connection.
Remote control needs to be reset. Disconnect and securely reconnect the remote
control from the patient monitor.
Remote control is defective. Replace the remote control with a known good one.
Masimo SET or Nellcor SPO2
Probe or module malfunction Five or more consecutive hardware
failures have occurred.
Review the input error log for Masimo or Nellcor
failure codes.
Troubleshooting: Error messages
Error messages
The fol l owi ng tabl e descr i bes er r or messages that may appear on the
di spl ay and how to resol ve the probl em.
NOTE
Refer to the appropri ate Dash Pati ent Moni tor operators manual for
parameter-speci fi c messages. Parameter messages are i denti fi ed i n
the troubl eshooti ng secti on of each parameter chapter.
Message Possible Reason/Solution
WARNING: The EEPROM data was found to be either INVALID
or uninitialized. GE factory defaults will be stored in both the
EEPROM and the monitors configuration memory. You will be
required to re-enter the network configuration, re-enable any
password protected features and restore all monitor settings and
site-specific defaults.
Following the EEPROM dump, restore data:
1. Restore internet address and IP address as requested by
the Boot Code.
2. Power cycle.
3. If error message persists, replace processor pcb. If error
message no longer occurs, re-enable any password
protected features and restore all patient monitor settings
and site-specific defaults via SERVICE MENU > Set
Configuration, and Options Menu.
WARNING: THIS VERSION OF BOOT CODE IS NOT
COMPATIBLE WITH THE VERSION OF MAIN CODE CURRENTLY
STORED IN FLASH. PLEASE UPDATE THE BOOT CODE.
1. Power cycle.
2. Reload Boot Code.
3. If problems persists, replace processor pcb.
Boot Flash test FAILED.
ERROR: The Boot Code stored in Flash is not valid. Main Code
cannot be loaded until valid Boot Code exists.
1. Power cycle.
Main Flash test FAILED.
ERROR: The Main Code stored in flash is not valid.
1. Power cycle.
Static RAM test FAILED.
ERROR: The SRAM memory test failed. Main Code will not be
loaded unless this test passes. Reboot the monitor to repeat
testing.
Replace processor pcb.
Real Time Clock FAILED - will not start.
WARNING: The real time clock chip is not running. Main Code
cannot be loaded until this chip is started. Attempting to start
real time clock...
Followed by either:
The real time clock was started. Select Start Patient Monitoring
to load and execute Main Code.
Or
ERROR: Unable to start the real time clock.
If problem persists and error message displays, replace
processor pcb.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE REQUIRED Perform all of the maintenance procedures listed under,
Maintenance schedule on page 5-2.
Troubleshooting: Error messages
Internal lithium battery is LOW.
NOTE
These messages ar e di spl ayed whi l e the pati ent
moni tor powers up. Once the I nternal l i thi um
battery i s LOW message appears, the pati ent
moni tor wi l l compl ete al l the power-up tests. Then,
after the l ast test i s compl eted, the fol l owi ng
message wi l l be di spl ayed on the boot l oader
screen.
ONE OR MORE POWER-UP TESTS HAVE
FAI LED ** SERVI CE MAY BE REQUI RED **
DO YOU WI SH TO CONTI NUE MONI TORI NG
ANYWAY?
1 =no, 2 =yes
The processor pcb battery may be depleted.
1. Select NO when the message, DO YOU WISH TO
CONTINUE MONITORING ANYWAY? appears.
2. Remove this patient monitor from service and use a
different patient monitor to monitor the patient.
3. Contact GE Service for lithium battery replacement
instructions.
The battery switch on processor pcb battery may be in the
off position.
1. Verify that switch 1 on the mini-dip switch (labeled S1) is
in the ON position.
2. To move the battery switch to the ON position, complete
the following steps.
a. If a plastic film is over the switch, remove and discard
the plastic film.
b. Use a small, flat-head screw driver to move the switch
to the ON position.
c. Complete all of the recommended checkout, electrical
safety tests, calibration tests listed in Checkout on
page 8-1.
The processor pcb may be defective.
Refer to Replace CPU/battery housing assembly on
page 7-36 to replace the processor pcb.
Message Possible Reason/Solution
ON position
831A
832A
Troubleshooting: Battery alarms and messages
Battery alarms and messages
Battery al arms occur when one of the fol l owi ng battery condi ti ons occur:
Low battery
Empty battery
Battery fai l ures
Charger fai l ures
These Battery messages hel p i denti fy the cause of a battery al arm.
Battery Messages appear i n three di fferent l ocati ons of the pati ent
moni tor:
ECG waveform area.
Battery Status I nformati on wi ndow.
Battery Fuel Gauge i con.
Battery messages displayed in the ECG waveform area
The fol l owi ng battery messages are di spl ayed i n the ECG Wavefor m
Area.
Battery messages displayed in the ECG waveform area
Message Battery alarm Cause
BATTERY LOW System WARNING
Critical Low BatteryOnly 10 minutes per battery of run
time remaining (10 minutes if one battery, 20 minutes if two
batteries).
POWERING DOWN System WARNING
Empty BatteryThere is no battery run time remaining.
CHECK BATT STATUS System MESSAGE
Battery FailureA minor failure has occurred while using or
charging the battery.
BATTERY ERROR System WARNING
Battery FailureA serious failure has occurred while using
or charging the battery. An incompatible battery may be
installed.
CHECK BATT STATUS
NOTE
I NTERNAL CHARGER
FAI LED, CALL SERVI CE
al so appears i n the Battery
Status i nformati on wi ndow.
System MESSAGE
Charger FailureCharger communications have failed.
Troubleshooting: Battery alarms and messages
Battery messages displayed in the Battery Status information
window
Battery Messages Displayed in the Battery Fuel Gauge Icon
The following battery message is displayed in the Battery Fuel Gauge
icon.
Battery messages displayed in the Battery Status Information window
Message Battery alarm Cause
INTERNAL CHARGER FAILED, CALL
SERVICE
NOTE
CHECK BATT STATUS al so
appears i n the ECG waveform
area.
System MESSAGE
Charger FailureCharger communications have failed.
CONDITION None
Condition The battery is requesting a conditioning cycle.
INCOMPAT appears in the SLOT STATUS.
All other fields in the Battery Status window
display UNKNOWN.
Incompatible battery installed.
Refer to Exchangeable or compatible battery packs on
page 2-9 for message definitions.
Battery Messages Displayed in the Battery Fuel Gauge Icon
Message Reason Solution
ERROR The battery is asleep,
faulty, or unrecognized.
The current status of the batterys health is in question. The Battery
Status information window will provide more specific information
about the health of the battery. See, How to identify battery charge
capacity on page 2-36.
If the battery is asleep and you need to wake up the battery, see
How to wake up the battery on page 5-12.
If the battery will not wake up it is probably faulty and should be
replaced.
Check the battery status screen in the Service Menu.
Troubleshooting: Writer or printer
Writer or printer
External
I f the pri nter does not pri nt:
Ensure the wri ter or pri nter i s turned ON.
Check al l cabl es for a good connecti on.
Check confi gured al arms and manual pri nt l ocati ons at the pati ent
moni tor.
Internal
I f the wri ter does not pri nt, check that i t has paper and that the paper i s
l oaded properl y.
Troubleshooting: No waveform at central station
No waveform at central station
I f you do not have a waveform at the central stati on:
Ensure the central stati on software i s compati bl e.
Check al l cabl es for a good connecti on.
Check the confi gured al arms and manual pri nt l ocati ons at the
pati ent moni tor.
Ensure the care uni t name i s the same i n the pati ent moni tor and i n
the central stati on.
Ensure the i nternet protocol (I P) addresses are confi gured correctl y.
Troubleshooting: Monitor defaults transfer
Monitor defaults transfer
Bel ow i s a l i st of error messages that may di spl ay when performi ng a
pati ent moni tor defaul ts transfer.
Storing monitor defaults
Copying stored monitor defaults
Message Description
ERROR - UNIT DEFAULTS HAVE NOT
BEEN SAVED
Patient monitor defaults were not saved on
the server patient monitor due to a memory
error in the patient monitor.
Message Description
ERROR COPYING UNIT DEFAULTS -
NETWORK ERROR
Either an error has occurred while the
defaults were being transferred, or defaults
have not been saved on the server patient
monitor.
UNIT TYPE MISMATCH
The server and client patient monitors are
set to different unit types (e.g., ADULT,
NEO, or OR)
SOFTWARE VERSION MISMATCH
The server and client patient monitors have
different software versions (e.g., V2C, V3A).
DATA CORRUPTION ERROR
The patient monitor defaults transferred have
become corrupted, possibly due to a
memory error.
SOFTWARE FEATURE LEVEL
MISMATCH
set to different software levels (e.g., Basic,
Cardiac, Cardiopulmonary).
COUNTRY CODE MISMATCH
set to different country codes (e.g.,
DEFAULT or FRANCE).
Troubleshooting: Change internet address
Change internet address
The i nternet address i s an i denti fi cati on number assi gned to each devi ce
on the opti onal Uni ty Network. I f the i nternet address has been
corrupted, changi ng i t must be done i n Boot Code usi ng a uni que
password. Contact your sal es/servi ce representati ve and provi de them
wi th the seri al number and i nternet address of the uni t to obtai n a
password.
WARNING
Lost Data. Dupl i cati on of an i nternet address on a
network wi l l cause l ost data. I f you change the factory-
assi gned i nternet address, you must fi rst record al l other
i nternet addresses used on your network to avoi d
dupl i cati on.
Acti vate the Boot Loader program as fol l ows:
1. Hol d down NBP Go/Stop (or NBP Auto on Dash 5000) and ZERO
ALL (FUNCTION) on the front panel .
3. Keep holding NBP Go/Stop (or NBP Auto) and ZERO ALL
(FUNCTION) unti l the Boot Loader i nformati on appears on the
di spl ay.
4. Sel ect Servi ce Menu > Opti on Menu > Change I nternet Address
to acqui re i nformati on requi red for password.
Troubleshooting: Review errors
Review errors
Thi s procedure descri bes how to revi ew the error l ogs of a pati ent
moni tor. I f the Uni ty Network software opti on i s enabl ed, the error l ogs
may al so be transferred over the network to a central stati on and copi ed
onto di skette for further revi ew or sent to GE personnel for revi ew. The
transferri ng procedure i s i n Get error l ogs on page 6-16.
WARNING
Thi s procedure i s i ntended for use by servi ce personnel
wi th advanced troubl eshooti ng ski l l s.
Some of the i nformati on recorded i n the error l ogs i s useful for fi el d
troubl eshooti ng. The detai l s i ncl uded here serve as an i ntroducti on to the
error l ogs and provi de basi c i nformati on about what you can l earn from
them.
1. Access Revi ew Errors starti ng from the Mai n Menu. Sel ect MORE
MENUS >MONI TOR SETUP >SERVI CE MODE.
0407)
3. Sel ect REVI EW ERRORS.
The menu provi des four error l og choi ces, two for vi ewi ng error l ogs and
two for cl eari ng the error l ogs.
View output or input errors
1. Sel ect VI EW OUTPUT ERRORS or VI EW I NPUT ERRORS to
vi ew one error i n the l og of errors.
The error l og i n a pati ent moni tor hol ds errors that can be accessed
wi th the NEXT or PREVI OUS command. The errors di spl ay one
error at a ti me i n the corner of the screen. Watch the error number
category to keep track of whi ch error you are vi ewi ng.
The VI EW OUTPUT ERRORS pr ovi des a l i st of output softwar e
errors; the VI EW I NPUT ERRORS provi des a l i st of i nput software
errors.
2. I f you have the wri ter opti on you can pri nt an error. Press Print or
Graph Go/Stop.
3. To cl ear al l the errors i n the error l og, sel ect CLEAR OUTPUT
ERRORS or CLEAR I NPUT ERRORS menu opti on. Be aware that
once the cl ear menu opti on i s executed, al l sel ected errors i n memory
are erased.
Useful error data
Bel ow i s sampl e error l og fol l owed by a descri pti on of parameters found
i n the error l og.
Process Name
The name of the software task that was operati ng when the event/
probl em occurred.
Error Code
The error l og contai ns more than just operati ng system errors. Many
events that have an i mpact upon the system are al so entered i nto the l og.
The 700-seri es of error codes are system-i ni ti ated events. Li sted bel ow
are some of the event/error codes you mi ght fi nd useful .
049A
This information is only
useful to the manufacturer.
Definition of error codes
Error code Description
400-4FF Network errors were detected.
703 Diagnostic tests were completed.
70B Internet address was changed. The network address for the patient
monitor was changed. This should only be done by qualified service
personnel.
70C Video test was completed. This test should only be performed by
qualified service personnel.
70E Time was changed from this patient monitor. This helps determine
how the system-wide time may have been altered.
NOTE
The pati ent moni tor may be referred to as a di spl ay or scope i n the
error code descri pti ons.
Severity
Severi ty i s a measure of how the event/error affected the system. There
are three l evel s of severi ty.
Conti nuethe event/error was l ogged, the task may have or may not
have been fi ni shed, but the system was abl e to go on. Most l og entri es
wi l l have a severi ty of Conti nue.
Fatal the event/error was such that the task i s not abl e to go on.
Recovery was not possi bl e. Thi s al ways i s fol l owed by a WARM
START.
Forced Restartthe system was restarted by a known condi ti on
(i nternet address change, vi deo test, etc).
Date and time
The date and ti me the event or probl em occurred.
Error number
A sequenti al number that i s used to i denti fy each event/probl em.
70F Date was changed from this patient monitor. This helps determine
how the system-wide date was altered.
710 Incompatible software was detected. If the main processor software
finds that the software operating on the communication software
incompatible, it turns off the communication (network) controller and
enters this data into the error log. When the patient monitor wont
talk to the network, looking for this entry in the error log is one part of
the troubleshooting process.
Definition of error codes
Troubleshooting: Get error logs
Get error logs
Get logs via PC using netUpdate
These i nstructi ons descri be how to copy l og fi l es from a Dash 3000/4000/
5000 pati ent moni tor to a PC usi ng one of the fol l owi ng confi gurati ons:
PC or PC l aptop connected to a Dash 3000/4000/5000 pati ent moni tor
PC or PC l aptop connected to the Uni ty Network MC network.
CAUTION
LOSS OF MONI TORI NG There may be a temporary
l oss of moni tori ng functi ons unti l the l og fi l e retri eval i s
compl ete. Do not copy l ogs whi l e a pati ent moni tor i s
connected to a pati ent. Medi cal staff shoul d be prepared
to cover pati ents i n need duri ng these peri ods of l ost
moni tori ng functi ons.
Requirements
PC to patient monitor or Dash Port 2 PC to Unity Network MC network
One patient monitor software upgrade CD-ROM V6.5 or later.
Microsoft
Windows
XP or 2000 operating system

CD-ROM drive
Network card
Pentium II processor or higher
Minimum 64 MB of RAM
Category 5 crossover patch cable
(pn 415480-001)
Category 5 network patch cable
(pn 408997-001)
NOTE
You must be able to change the IP address on the PC.
If you are using a PC laptop with a docking station, remove the laptop from the docking
station before you begin the log transfer.
If you are using a PC with a wireless network connection, remove or disable the
wireless network card before you begin the log transfer.
If the patient monitor is using a Dash Port, remove the patient monitor from the docking
station before you begin the log transfer.
Connect the PC to Dash patient monitor or Unity Network MC network
NOTE
Connect the pati ent moni tor and PC to a rel i abl e power source
duri ng the transfer process. Do not use battery power. A battery
fai l ure duri ng the transfer process may resul t i n a transfer process
fai l ure.
1. Connect one end of the category 5 crossover or network patch cabl e to
the PC network card.
2. Connect the other end of the category 5 crossover patch cabl e as
fol l ows:
Connect to the ETHERNET port of the docki ng stati on i f the
pati ent moni tor i s usi ng a Dash Port 2 docki ng stati on.
Connect to the ETHERNET port of the pati ent moni tor i f no
docki ng stati on or network i s used.
Connect to the Uni ty Network MC network Ethernet tap i f
transferri ng l ogs from other devi ses on the network. I f you
connect di rectl y to the Uni ty Network MC network Ethernet tap,
veri fy that the pati ent moni tor or docki ng stati on i s al so
connected to the Uni ty Network MC network Ethernet tap.
3. Power on the PC.
4. Conti nue wi th the i nstructi ons, Change the PCs I P address on
page 6-18.
Change the PCs IP address
Windows XP Windows 2000
1. From the toolbar, select Start > Run.
2. Type cmd and press Enter.
3. Type ipconfig<space>/all and press Enter.
4. If the IP address and subnet mask are defined, record them:
IP address: ______________________________________
Subnet mask: ____________________________________
5. From the toolbar, select Start > Control Panel > Network
Connections.
From the toolbar, select Start > Settings > Control Panel >
Network and Dial-up Connections.
6. Right-click Local Area Connection.
7. Select Properties.
8. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
9. Click Properties.
10. Select Use the following IP address.
11. In the IP Address field, type an IP address. If the patient monitors address begins with 126, use 126.003.145.229.
If using a PC connected to the Unity Network MC network, the IP address on the PC must match the institutions Unity Network
MC network domain. The network domain is defined by the first numbers used in the IP address and subnet mask. If the
patient monitors address does not begin with 126, contact the IT department for an IP address.
If using a PC connected to a Dash patient monitor or Dash Port 2 docking station with a patient monitor, and the IP address
does not begin with 126, change the PC IP address to match the first 3 digits of the patient monitors address. The remaining
address must be unique.
12. In the Subnet mask field, type 255.0.0.0.
13. In the Default gateway field, type 126.003.145.229 and click OK.
14. If prompted to restart the PC, select No.
15. From the toolbar, select Start > Control Panel. From the toolbar, select Start > Settings > Control Panel.
16. Double-click System and select the Computer Name tab. Double-click System and select the Network Identification
tab.
17. Record the full computer name: __________________________________________
18. Close all open windows.
19. Restart the PC.
20. Continue with the instructions, Disable firewall or networking services on page 6-19.
Disable firewall or networking services
I f the PC i s runni ng a fi rewal l protecti on or networki ng servi ces, such as
Ci sco Systems VPN, Bl ackI ce or a wi rel ess network card, perform the
fol l owi ng procedure to di sabl e these servi ces on the PC.
1. Sel ect one of the fol l owi ng from the tool bar:
Wi ndows XP: Start >Control Panel >Admi ni strati ve Tool s >
Servi ces.
Wi ndows 2000: Start >Setti ngs >Control Panel >
Admi ni strati ve Tool s >Servi ces.
2. I n the l i st of avai l abl e fi rewal l /networki ng servi ces, doubl e-cl i ck the
servi ce (e.g. Bl ackI CE) to be di sabl ed.
3. I n the speci fi c servi ce (e.g. Bl ackI CE) properti es wi ndow, sel ect Stop.
4. Veri fy that the Service status reads Stopped.
5. Sel ect OK and cl ose al l wi ndows.
6. Repeat these i nstructi ons for al l VPN, wi rel ess network cards or any
fi rewal l protecti on programs runni ng on your PC.
NOTE
I f you are unsure of the fi rewal l /networki ng servi ces on your PC,
contact your l ocal I T admi ni strator for detai l s. Wi ndows 2000 and XP
PCs al l ow you to send a l i st of servi ces to your I T admi ni strator.
937A
Stop
button
Service
status
938A
Set up a log folder and get logs
NOTE
Use the Li st or Detai l s vi ew on your PC when starti ng the
netUpdate.exe appl i cati on. Do not use the Thumbnai l vi ew.
Al ways run the netUpdate.exe appl i cati on from the CD-ROM
di rectory. Do not run the appl i cati on from any other di rectory.
1. Make sure the pati ent moni tor i s i n moni tori ng mode.
2. I nsert the CD-ROM i nto the CD-ROM dri ve.
3. Doubl e-cl i ck My Computer.
4. Create a fol der for the l og fi l es i n the root di rectory. (e.g. C:\ logs)
5. Return to My Computer and doubl e-cl i ck the CD-ROM dri ve.
6. Sel ect dl > code > netUpdate.exe.
7. I n the netUpdate wi ndow, sel ect the pati ent moni tor name or I P
address from the devi ce l i st. Cl i ck Refresh unti l the I P address or
pati ent moni tor name di spl ays.
8. Cl i ck Get Log or Get Al l Logs.
939A
NOTE
I f you sel ect Get Al l Logs and are connected to the Uni ty
Network, l ogs from every devi ce type sel ected wi l l transfer.
9. Sel ect the fol der you created for l og fi l es, then cl i ck OK.
10. The l og fi l e di spl ays and a message at the top of the netUpdate
wi ndow di spl ays a message that the l og retri eval was successful .
Get logs via CIC
Requirements
Cl i ni cal I nformati on Center (CI C) networked to the pati ent
moni tor(s)
Get logs
1. At the CI C, sel ect Vi ew Other > Sel ect Uni t > Sel ect Bed to veri fy
that the pati ent moni tor(s) can be vi ewed.
2. From the CI C Mai n Menu, sel ect SETUP CI C.
3. Sel ect the SERVI CE PASSWORD tab.
4. Type the password mms_com and press Enter.
5. At the command prompt, type
getlog -n unit| device -p C:\ filename (i ncl udi ng quotes)
where uni t| devi ce i s the pati ent moni tor name, and
C:\fi l ename i s the CI C l ocati on youre copyi ng to.
Type getlog /? to di spl ay other opti ons for error code generati on.
6. Press Enter.
Get logs via Centralscope
NOTE
The Uni ty Network software opti on must be enabl ed before the error
l ogs may be transferred over the network to a Central scope central
stati on.
The fol l owi ng procedure descri bes how to copy the pati ent moni tor and
parameter modul e error l ogs and then transfer them to a di skette at the
Central scope central stati on.
CAUTION
Thi s procedure i s i ntended for use by servi ce personnel
wi th advanced troubl eshooti ng ski l l s. Do not
experi ment wi th these commands! The consequences of
mi suse i ncl ude l oss of pati ent data, corrupti on of the
central stati on operati ng software, or di srupti on of the
enti re Uni ty Network.
Access the COPY LOGS menu
1. Begi nni ng wi th the Central scope central stati on Mai n Menu, sel ect
CENTRAL SETUP >SERVI CE.
2. Enter password: MEI CS 123
3. Sel ect COPY LOGS. The Copy Logs menu di spl ays.
4. Sel ect the Care Uni t.
5. Sel ect UNI T:
6. Usi ng the Trim Knob control , change the di spl ayed Care Uni t
name. When the desi red Care Uni t name di spl ays, press the Trim
Knob control .
Select the monitoring device
1. Sel ect DEVI CE:
2. Usi ng the Trim Knob control , change the di spl ayed devi ce name.
Note that onl y moni tori ng devi ces wi thi n the previ ousl y sel ected
Care Uni t show. When the desi red moni tori ng devi ce name di spl ays,
press the Trim Knob control .
Select the error log date
1. Sel ect DATE:
2. Usi ng the Trim Knob control , change the error l og date. Note that
one of the sel ecti ons i s ALL, whi ch retri eves al l stored error l ogs from
the speci fi ed devi ce. When the desi red date di spl ays, press the Trim
Knob control .
048A
044A
045A
046A
Copy error logs
Once the Care Uni t, devi ce, and date have been speci fi ed the fi nal step i s
to begi n copyi ng the error l ogs to the fl oppy di skette.
1. I nsert a PC-formatted, hi gh-densi ty fl oppy di skette i nto the fl oppy
di skette dri ve of the central stati on.
2. Sel ect START COPY. A new di spl ay appears that confi rms the fi l e
source devi ce.
3. Usi ng the Trim Knob control , sel ect the desi red functi on. Press the
Trim Knob control to start.
Once the copy functi on begi ns the Start Copy button changes to
show the functi on: copyi ng.
Eject floppy
Sel ect thi s opti on to eject the fl oppy di skette from the central stati ons
di sk dri ve.
047A
Troubleshooting: Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN
Many factors coul d cause the wi rel ess pati ent moni tor to exhi bi t some
form of i nterrupti on i n communi cati on, such as l oss of waveforms or
del ayed communi cati on response. The sol uti on may be as si mpl e as
enabl i ng the wi rel ess communi cati on feature or as compl ex as anal yzi ng
the wi rel ess and wi red network. The purpose of thi s secti on i s to hel p
i denti fy the source of the probl em by usi ng the wi rel ess status i ndi cator
that i s part of the moni tor.
A pati ent moni tor wi th the 802.11 wi rel ess technol ogy has a wi rel ess
status i ndi cator i n the REVI SI ON AND I D Menu. For the 802.11b
wi rel ess pati ent moni tor, there are two di fferent wi rel ess status
i ndi cators. One i s l ocated i n the REVI SI ON AND I D Menu and one i n
the Servi ce Menu.
Before troubl eshooti ng, i denti fy the wi rel ess technol ogy used i n the
pati ent moni tor.
Access Service Mode
Access the Servi ce Mode menu starti ng from the Mai n menu.
0407).
930A
929A
REVISION AND ID Menu Service Menu
Identify the wireless technology
1. From the Moni tor Setup Menu, sel ect REVI SI ON AND I D.
2. Sel ect NEXT unti l the HARDWARE I D DI SPLAY i nformati on
wi ndow di spl ays.
3. I f the WI RELESS LAN I D fi el d di spl ays associ ati on status, dri ver
versi on, si gnal qual i ty status and transmi t rate status (For exampl e:
01 G3.93-73e 55 04), then your wi rel ess card i s 802.11b technol ogy.
Go to 802.11b on page 6-26 for further troubl eshooti ng.
I f the WI RELESS LAN I D fi el d i s mi ssi ng, then the pati ent moni tor
ei ther does not have wi rel ess technol ogy (hardware and software)
i nstal l ed or the wi rel ess feature i s not enabl ed. Go to Confi rm or
confi gure wi rel ess LAN on page 4-14 to enabl e the feature, then go
to 802.11 on page 6-29 or 802.11b on page 6-26 for further
troubl eshooti ng.
930A
802.11b Wireless
technology
802.11b
I denti fyi ng the source of a wi rel ess communi cati on probl em can be a
chal l enge because of the dependenci es between the pati ent moni tor and
the wi rel ess/wi red network. Bel ow i s a si mpl i fi ed troubl eshooti ng process
to determi ne where the probl em ori gi nates. Fol l owi ng that are detai l ed
steps to di spl ay status and anal yze i nformati on.
Analyze WIRELESS LAN ID field
Di spl ay the WI RELESS LAN I D fi el d as fol l ows:
1. From the Moni tor Setup menu, sel ect REVI SI ON AND I D.
2. Sel ect NEXT unti l the HARDWARE I D DI SPLAY i nformati on
wi ndow di spl ays.
NOTE
I f the WI RELESS LAN I D fi el d does NOT di spl ay a status code
as shown bel ow, then wi rel ess technol ogy i s not used or not
enabl ed. See Confi rm or confi gure wi rel ess LAN on page 4-14 to
enabl e the wi rel ess feature.
The WI RELESS LAN I D fi el d does not refresh. You must exi t
and re-enter the menu.
For proper operati on of the 802.11b wi rel ess pati ent moni tor, anal yze the
associ ati on, si gnal qual i ty and transmi t rate status.
Take the patient monitor
to the location that
exhibited the problem.
Display WIRELESS
LAN ID field.
Press Graph or
Print to printout
WIRELESS
LAN ID field.*
Display WIRELESS LAN
STATUS in the service
menu.
Press Graph or
Print to print out
WIRELESS LAN
STATUS.*
Analyze the
WIRELESS LAN ID
printout.
Analyze the
WIRELESS LAN
STATUS printout.
Determine source
of the problem.
933A *If the patient monitor does not have a
printer, write down the information.
0X G3.93-73e XX XX
Association status Signal quality status Transmit rate status
The fol l owi ng tabl e defi nes al l possi bl e status val ues.
These val ues shoul d be:
I f the associ ati on status i s other than 01, i t i s l i kel y 0B (SSI D or PASS
KEY i ncorrect). Veri fy that the SSI D and PASS KEY matches the access
poi nt confi gurati on. Go to Confi rm or confi gure wi rel ess LAN on
page 4-14 for steps to check the setti ngs.
Status Description
Association status
00 Dash is not connected wirelessly
0B SSID/PASS KEY incorrect
0C Wireless card firmware to request wireless card to reset
01 Dash connected to network
02 Wireless Dash disconnected
03 Wireless Dash roaming
04 Access point radio MAC scan
05 TKIP set has changes. Next TKIP can be computed
06 Next TKIP can be loaded
Signal quality status
1
1. Signal quality status is not a calibrated SNR (signal/noise ratio) value.
Less than 4 No signal
5 8 Very low
9 4 Low
15 20 Good
21 26 Very good
27 and greater Excellent
Transmit rate status
01 1 Mbps
02 2 Mbps
04 5.5 Mbps
08 11 Mbps
Association Status 01
Signal Quality Status greater than 20
Transmit Rate Status 04 or greater
I f si gnal qual i ty and transmi t rate statuses are l ess than the above
val ues, the source of the probl em i s l i kel y the wi rel ess network (access
poi nt). Go to Anal yze WI RELESS LAN STATUS screen bel ow and
contact your l ocal hospi tal I T department for further troubl eshooti ng.
I f associ ati on status, si gnal qual i ty and transmi t statuses meet the
requi rements, then the wi rel ess pati ent moni tor i s not the source of the
probl em. Contact your l ocal hospi tal I T department for further
troubl eshooti ng.
Analyze WIRELESS LAN STATUS screen
Di spl ay the WI RELESS LAN STATUS screen by enteri ng Servi ce
Mode (see Access Servi ce Mode on page 6-24) and sel ecti ng MONI TOR
SETTI NGS > WI RELESS LAN STATUS.
The WI RELESS LAN STATUS screen di spl ays the same i nformati on as
the WI RELESS LAN I D fi el d al ong wi th advanced status fi el ds.
Personnel wi th speci al i zed trai ni ng (hospi tal I T or network engi neer) can
i nterpret thi s i nformati on.
1. Check that the i nformati on updates every 4 seconds i ndi cati ng
communi cati on.
2. Check for the fol l owi ng status i nformati on:
ASSOCIATION CONNECTED
TRANSMIT RATE Greater than 5.5 Mbit
PERCENT CRC ERRORS 00
TRANSMIT FAILURES 00000
929A
Check these
values to
determine network
communication
Check this value
to determine if
wireless is
enabled
3. I f the ASSOCI ATI ON status i n the WI RELESS LAN STATUS
wi ndow i s other than CONNECTED, see Confi rm or confi gure
wi rel ess LAN on page 4-14 to check i f the wi rel ess feature i s
enabl ed.
Contact GE Techni cal Support for addi ti onal assi stance.
802.11
Country code mismatched
The pati ent moni tor i s confi gured wi th i nternati onal roami ng. The
country abbrevi ati on code (US 02 V4.63 00022) must match the country
the pati ent moni tor i s i n. I f the code does not match:
1. Check to make sure the correct Access Poi nt i s i nstal l ed.
2. Refer to the wi rel ess LAN (Symbol Access Poi nt) I nstal l ati on and
Servi ce Manual for detai l s on proper Access Poi nt i nstal l ati on.
SSID incorrect
The most common cause of non-communi cati on i s an i ncorrect SSI D. I f
the communi cati on status i n the WI RELESS LAN I D i s 01 (US 01
V4.63 00022), the wi rel ess card i s not communi cati ng wi th the Access
Poi nt. The SSI D must match the Access Poi nts NET I D. To change the
SSI D status access the Servi ce Mode menu starti ng from the Mai n
menu:
1. Enter Servi ce Mode (see Access Servi ce Mode on page 6-24) and
sel ect MONI TOR SETTI NGS > CONFI GURE WI RELESS LAN.
2. Sel ect MONI TOR SETTI NGS > CONFI GURE WI RELESS LAN.
3. Sel ect SSI D.
4. For al l standard i nstal l ati ons, the SSI D shoul d be GEMS (defaul t).
Check network communication
I f the communi cati on status i s 02, the wi rel ess card i s communi cati ng
wi th the Access Poi nt and the network shoul d be avai l abl e.
1. Check the network connecti on to the Access Poi nt.
2. Refer to the wi rel ess LAN (Symbol Access Poi nt) I nstal l ati on and
Servi ce Manual for detai l s on proper Access Poi nt i nstal l ati on.
I ntermi ttent communi cati on may be caused i f the pati ent moni tor i s out
of range or there i s RF i nterference.
I f the pati ent moni tor i s out of range, add addi ti onal Access Poi nts to
extend the coverage area.
I f there i s RF i nterference, the source of the i nterference must be
removed or shi el ded.
I f al l communi cati on checks out, repl ace the wi rel ess card. Go to the
Fi el d Repl aceabl e Uni ts chapter for i nformati on.
7 Field replaceable units
Field replaceable units: Ordering parts
Ordering parts
The parts l i sts and drawi ngs i n thi s chapter suppl y enough detai l for you
to order parts for the assembl i es consi dered fi el d repl aceabl e.
I f you requi re addi ti onal i nformati on or troubl eshooti ng assi stance,
contact GE Techni cal Support.
To order parts, contact Servi ce Parts at the address or tel ephone number
l i sted on the How to Reach Us... page found i n the front of thi s manual .
For the l atest parts i nformati on, i ncl udi ng substi tuti ons, obsol escence
and compati bi l i ty, pl ease vi si t our Parts I D Portal websi te at:
egems.gemedi cal systems.com/partsi duser/gems/Wel come.jsp
Field replaceable units: Parts
Parts
The tabl e bel ow l i sts fi el d repl aceabl e uni ts that can be ordered.
NOTE
Due to recent brandi ng changes, the part ordered may vary sl i ghtl y
i n appearance from the previ ous part. Performance i s not affected.
Check the Par ts I D Por tal websi te l i nk (see previ ous page) for a ful l
l i st of avai l abl e parts.
Part number Description
Dash
3000
Dash
4000
Dash
5000
Handle assemblies - See Remove or replace handle assembly on page 7-9 for disassembly.
2026653-013 DASH HANDLE WITHOUT ALARM WITH WIRELESS
LAN
Includes assembled handle, antennas and hardware.
X X X
2026653-014 DASH HANDLE WITH ALARM WITH WIRELESS LAN
Includes assembled handle, antennas and hardware.
X
Display assemblies - See Remove or replace display assembly on page 7-12 for disassembly.
2026653-002 DASH 5K NEC DISPLAY ASSEMBLY
Includes complete display assembly, flex, labels and
hardware for Dash 5000 patient monitor.
NOTE: V6 software or later required.
X
2026653-003 DASH 5K NEC DISPLAY ASSEMBLY WITHOUT LCD
Includes display components, flex assembly, labels
and hardware for Dash 5000 patient monitor. (no
LCD)
NOTE: V6 software or later required.
X
2026653-004 DASH 4K DISPLAY ASSEMBLY
Includes complete display assembly, flex, labels and
X
2026653-005 DASH 4K DISPLAY ASSY WITHOUT LCD
Includes display components, flex assembly, labels
and hardware for Dash 4000 patient monitor. (no
LCD)
NOTE: This kit is for a Sharp display only.
X
2026653-006 DASH 3K DISPLAY ASSEMBLY
Includes complete display assembly (including flex
and inverter) and labels for Dash 3000 patient
monitor.
X
2026653-007 See Replace display assembly parts on page 7-20 for
disassembly.
DASH 3K DISPLAY ASSEMBLY WITHOUT LCD
Includes display components and labels for Dash
3000 patient monitor. (no LCD)
X
Display flex assembly - See Replace display flex assembly on page 7-18 for disassembly.
2013114-026 DASH 4K(SHARP)/5K DISPLAY FLEX
Includes complete display flex for Dash 4000 (Sharp
display)/5000 patient monitors.
X X
Alarm light assemblies - See Replace display assembly parts on page 7-20 for disassembly.
2026653-025 DASH 4K ALARM LIGHT ASSEMBLY
Includes alarm light, cable, lens and lens blank for
10 Dash 4000 patient monitor.
X
2026653-026 DASH 5K ALARM LIGHT ASSEMBLY
Includes alarm light, cable, lens and lens blank for
12 Dash 5000 patient monitor.
X
Inverter assemblies - See Replace display assembly parts on page 7-20 for disassembly.
2026653-022 DASH 3K DISPLAY INVERTER
Includes display inverter and cable for Dash 3000
patient monitor.
X
2021926-005 DASH 4K/5K DISPLAY INVERTER
Includes display inverter and cable for Dash 4000/
5000 patient monitor.
X X
Keypad or Trim Knob assemblies - See Replace display assembly parts on page 7-20 for
disassembly.
2026653-016 DASH 3K KEYPAD ASSEMBLY
Includes keypad assembly with encoder and
X
X
X
2026653-024 DASH3K/4K/5K TRIM KNOB
Includes Trim Knobs and clip.
X X X
Dash
3000
Dash
4000
Dash
5000
DAS assemblies - See Replace main unit parts on page 7-27 for disassembly.
2026653-008 DASH Generic OHMEDA DAS
Includes Generic Ohmeda DAS assembly, labels and
hardware.
NOTE: v2B software or later required with DAS v5.
X X X
2026653-009 DASH MASIMO DAS
Includes Masimo DAS assembly, labels and
hardware.
NOTE: v5 software or later required.
X X X
2026653-010 DASH NELLCOR-OXIMAX DAS
Includes Nellcor OxiMax DAS assembly, labels and
hardware.
NOTE: v5.4 software or later required.
X X X
Wireless LAN assemblies - Replacement instructions ship with the FRU kit.
2026653-011 DASH WLAN PCMCIA 802.11
Includes PCMCIA wireless card, connectors,
hardware and labels for 802.11. (no antennas)
X X X
2026653-012 DASH WLAN COMPACT FLASH 802.11B
Includes compact flash wireless card with adapter,
connectors, hardware and labels for 802.11b. (no
antennas)
NOTE: v5.4 software or later required.
X X X
NBP pump assembly - See Replace main unit parts on page 7-27 for disassembly.
2013114-020 DASH NBP PUMP ASSEMBLY
Includes NBP assembly and hardware.
X X X
Writer assembly or flex - See Replace main unit parts on page 7-27 for disassembly.
2026653-015 DASH WRITER FLEX
Includes writer flex and hardware.
X X X
2026653-021 WRITER 50MM CS2
Includes light gray writer with captive hardware.
X X X
Speaker assembly - See Replace main unit parts on page 7-27 for disassembly.
2013114-017 DASH SPEAKER ASSEMBLY
Includes speaker assembly and hardware.
X X X
CPU with battery housing assembly - See Replace main unit parts on page 7-27 for disassembly.
2026653-032 DASH CPU WITH BATTERY HOUSING WITH
WIRELESS LAN
Includes CPU/battery housing assembly, PCMCIA
card retaining plate and hardware.
NOTE: v6.5 or later software required.
X X X
Dash
3000
Dash
4000
Dash
5000
Power supply assembly - See Replace main unit parts on page 7-27 for disassembly.
2013114-018 DASH POWER SUPPLY
Includes power supply assembly and hardware.
X X X
Battery door assembly - See Replace battery door on page 7-41 for disassembly.
2026653-019 DASH BATTERY DOOR
Includes frame, fasteners and silicone doors.
X X X
Foot and writer cover assemblies - See Replace battery door on page 7-41 or Replace foot on
page 7-42 for disassembly.
2026653-020 DASH FOOT AND WRITER COVER
Includes dark blue foot, light gray writer cover and
hardware.
X X X
Batteries
2017857-002 RECHARGEABLE 11.1V BATTERY X X X
Hardware and labels
2013114-029 HARDWARE KIT X X
Labels
2026653-027 DASH 3K/4K/5K SIDE LABELS
Includes all languages
X X X
2026653-028 DASH 5K FRONT LABELS
X
2026653-029 DASH 4K FRONT/DAS LABELS
X
2026653-030 DASH 3K FRONT/DAS LABELS
X
Dash
3000
Dash
4000
Dash
5000
Field replaceable units: Disassembly guidelines
Disassembly guidelines
WARNINGS
REPAI R TO THE FRU LEVEL Fi el d repai rs are
recommended to the fi el d repl aceabl e uni t (FRU) onl y.
Attempti ng a fi el d repai r on a PCB or a factory seal ed
component or assembl y coul d jeopardi ze the safe and
effecti ve operati on of the pati ent moni tor.
DAS ASSEMBLY Do NOT open the DAS assembl y as
thi s breaks the i sol ati on barri er whi ch may resul t i n
pati ent death or seri ous i njury. The DAS assembl y i s a
fi el d repl aceabl e uni t onl y. There are NO fi el d repai rs or
adjustments for the DAS assembl y.
BATTERY EXPLOSI ON HAZARD When removi ng
the GCX pl ate and the footpad from the bottom of the
pati ent moni tor, cl earl y i denti fy the screws to ensure the
same screws are used to repl ace both the footpad and the
GCX pl ate. Do not r e-assembl e the footpad wi thout the
GCX pl ate. Screws that are too l ong wi l l penetrate i nto
the battery case and cause the battery to l eak or to
expl ode.
NOTE
GE recommends that you assembl e the pati ent moni tor usi ng the
new fasteners (screws, washers, etc.) provi ded i n the FRU Ki ts. Some
fasteners, l i ke the screws wi th a thread l ocki ng coati ng, are not
i ntended to be re-used more than three ti mes.
Tools required
A standard set of hand tool s i s requi red for di sassembl y and assembl y.
Before disassembly
Before you di sassembl e the pati ent moni tor, you shoul d always do the
fol l owi ng tasks.
1. Remove AC power.
2. Remove both batteri es.
3. Provi de appropri ate el ectrostati c di scharge protecti on to prevent
damagi ng the pati ent moni tor.
4. Be aware that the nonspeci fi c di sassembl y i nstructi ons appl y to al l
pati ent moni tors supported by thi s servi ce manual . Di sassembl y for
speci fi c model s of the pati ent moni tor are i denti fi ed when requi red.
Field replaceable units: Disassembly guidelines
Hardware precautions
When di sassembl i ng the pati ent moni tor, observe the fol l owi ng
gui del i nes:
Remove the handl e assembl y, then remove the di spl ay assembl y to
access the fi el d repl aceabl e uni ts of the di spl ay assembl y and the
mai n uni t.
Note the posi ti ons of wi res, cabl es, and di fferent si zed screws;
marki ng them i f necessary to ensure they are repl aced correctl y.
Do not ki nk, pi nch, stretch, twi st, or ti ghtl y fol d a fl ex cabl e.
Unl ess otherwi se stated, reassembl e the pati ent moni tor i n reverse
order of di sassembl y.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) precautions
Al l external connector i nputs and outputs of the pati ent moni tor are
desi gned wi th protecti on from ESD damage. However, i f the pati ent
moni tor requi res servi ce, exposed components and assembl i es contai ned
wi thi n are suscepti bl e to ESD damage. Thi s i ncl udes human hands, non-
ESD protected work stati ons and/or i mproperl y grounded test
equi pment.
The fol l owi ng gui del i nes hel p make a servi ce workstati on more resi stant
to the ESD damage:
Di scharge any stati c charge you may have bui l t up before handl i ng
semi conductors or assembl i es contai ni ng semi conductors.
A grounded, anti stati c wri stband (3M part number 2046 or
equi val ent) or heel strap shoul d be worn at all times whi l e handl i ng
or repai ri ng assembl i es contai ni ng semi conductors.
Use properl y grounded sol deri ng and test equi pment.
Use a stati c-free work surface (3M part number 8210 or equi val ent)
whi l e handl i ng or worki ng on assembl i es contai ni ng semi conductors.
Do not remove semi conductors or assembl i es contai ni ng
semi conductors from anti stati c contai ners (Vel o-stat bags) unti l
absol utel y necessary.
Make sure power to an assembl y i s turned off before removi ng or
i nserti ng a semi conductor.
Do not sl i de semi conductors or el ectri cal /el ectroni c assembl i es across
any surface.
Do not touch semi conductor l eads unl ess absol utel y necessary.
Semi conductors and el ectri cal /el ectroni c assembl i es shoul d be stored
onl y i n anti stati c bags or boxes.
Handl e al l PCB assembl i es by thei r edges.
Do not fl ex or twi st the ci rcui t board.
These gui del i nes may not guaranty a 100% stati c-free workstati on, but
can greatl y reduce the potenti al for fai l ure of any el ectri cal /el ectroni c
assembl i es bei ng servi ced.
Field replaceable units: Remove or replace handle assembly
Remove or replace handle assembly
1. Remove the two screws hol di ng the handl e to the pati ent moni tor.
Take care not to strai n the cabl es i f your pati ent moni tor has the
al arm l i ght opti on or the wi rel ess opti on.
2. I f your pati ent moni tor does NOT have the wi rel ess opti on, repl ace
the defecti ve handl e assembl y or conti nue to Remove or repl ace
di spl ay assembl y on page 7-12 to repl ace other parts.
I f your pati ent moni tor has the wi rel ess opti on, connect the antenna
as fol l ows.
a. Di sassembl e the new handl e assembl y by removi ng two screws.
NOTE
There may be one or two antennas dependi ng on the wi rel ess
technol ogy i n your pati ent moni tor. Handl e the antennas and
connectors careful l y as they can easi l y be damaged.
b. I nstal l the tubi ng on the wi rel ess antenna(s).
c. I nstal l the antenna(s) i nto the pl asti c grooves.
537A
936A
Tubing
d. Reassembl e the handl e wi th the two screws. Route antenna (and
al arm l i ght cabl e, i f present) out the bottom of the handl e as
shown so antenna i s not pi nched between the handl e hal ves.
e. Remove the di spl ay assembl y. Refer to Remove or repl ace
di spl ay assembl y on page 7-12.
f. Route antenna (and al arm l i ght cabl e, i f present) i nto the pati ent
moni tors housi ng as shown.
NOTE
I f the new handl e assembl y has an al arm l i ght, the DAS
assembl y must be removed to connect the cabl e to J1 on the
wri ter board. Refer to Repl ace DAS assembl y on page 7-27 for
i nstructi ons on removi ng and rei nstal l i ng the DAS assembl y.
565C
alarm light cable
568B
antenna
g. Use a needl e nose pl i ers to snap the coax connector of the
antenna i nto the wi rel ess card. Route coax per the pi cture.
h. Rei nstal l the di spl ay assembl y.
567B
Connect antenna
to wireless card.
Field replaceable units: Remove or replace display assembly
Remove or replace display assembly
1. Remove the handl e assembl y from the pati ent moni tor. Refer to
Remove or repl ace handl e assembl y on page 7-9.
2. Pl ace the pati ent moni tor face down on a non-abrasi ve, stati c-free
surface. Make sure the Trim Knob control hangs off the edge of the
sur face to avoi d damage.
3. Use a Phi l l i ps head screw dri ver to remove the four screws (si x
screws for Dash 5000 pati ent moni tors) hol di ng the di spl ay assembl y
to the mai n uni t.
...and the two shorter
screws from the bottom of
the unit.
one screw on the right side of the
unit...
one screw on the left side of the
unit...
579A
578B
580A
Note: Use a screwdriver
with a long blade or
remove the GCX plate first
for easy access to the
bottom screws.
4. Parti al l y separate the di spl ay assembl y from the mai n uni t and l ook
i nsi de the uni t to determi ne how the di spl ay fl ex cabl e i s fol ded.
Dependi ng on the model , the Dash pati ent moni tor may have a
di spl ay fl ex cabl e that fol ds up from the bottom or from the ri ght si de
of the di spl ay.
The l ocati on of the fol d di ctates how to posi ti on the di spl ay assembl y
to remove i t from the mai n uni t.
CAUTION
CABLE DAMAGE Do not ki nk, pi nch, stretch, twi st,
or ti ghtl y fol d the di spl ay fl ex cabl e. I f you do not handl e
the fl ex cabl e gentl y, you wi l l damage the cabl e.
893A
The Dash 5000 patient
monitor has two additional
screws.
Flex cable folds up
from the bottom of the
display assembly.
869A
Green-colored
display shield
5. To prevent damagi ng the di spl ay fl ex cabl e, posi ti on the di spl ay
assembl y for the pati ent moni tor you are servi ci ng.
Flex cable folds over
from the right side of
the display assembly.
870A
Gold-colored display
shield
1-inch
(2.54 cm)
830A
Display assembly with green-colored display shield
6. Remove the two screws attachi ng the fl ex ci rcui t to the mai n uni ts
CPU/battery housi ng assembl y. Remove the fl ex connector by pul l i ng
on the fl ex connector strai n rel i ef.
871A
Display assembly with gold-colored display shield
two screws
543A
7. Remove the DAS connector by l i fti ng the snap l atch and tabs.
8. Pl ace the di spl ay assembl y face down on a non-stati c, non-abrasi ve
surface. Make sure the Trim Knob control hangs off the edge of the
sur face to avoi d damage.
9. Repl ace the defecti ve di spl ay assembl y.
10. To repl ace the Di spl ay Fl ex assembl y, refer to Repl ace di spl ay fl ex
assembl y on page 7-18.
11. To repl ace parts i n the mai n uni t, refer to Repl ace mai n uni t parts
on page 7-27.
12. Refer to the fi gure bel ow to determi ne i f you need to enabl e or di sabl e
the al arm l i ght on your Dash di spl ay assembl y.
tabs
latch
544A
877A
clear lens
(enable light)
opaque lens
(disable light)
J2 alarm light jumper
878A
a. To enabl e the al arm l i ght opti on, veri fy the al arm l i ght jumper i s
connected to both J2 pi ns on the al arm l i ght PCB.
b. To di sabl e the al arm l i ght opti on, remove the jumper from the
al arm l i ght PCB, or connect the jumper to onl y one of the J2 pi ns
on the al arm l i ght PCB.
13. Connect the di spl ay assembl y to the mai n uni t.
14. Refer page 7-12 and re-assembl e the pati ent moni tor i n reverse
order.
15. Appl y the Dash front panel l abel as shown bel ow.
16. Compl ete the procedures i n Recommended checkout on page 7-44.
894A
Front panel label
Field replaceable units: Replace display flex assembly
Replace display flex assembly
Dash 3000 display flex assembly
The Dash 3000 di spl ay assembl y i ncl udes the fl ex assembl y.
1. Remove the handl e and di spl ay assembl i es accordi ng to steps
starti ng on page 7-9.
2. Repl ace the di spl ay assembl y and reassembl e the pati ent moni tor i n
reverse order of di sassembl y.
Dash 4000 Sharp and 5000 display flex assembly
CAUTION
FLEX CABLE DAMAGE Do not ki nk, pi nch, stretch,
twi st, or ti ghtl y fol d a fl ex cabl e.
1. Remove the handl e assembl y. Refer to page 7-9.
2. Remove the di spl ay assembl y from the mai n uni t. Refer to page 7-12.
NOTE
Use a thi ck book or some heavy object to support the di spl ay
assembl y whi l e you attach the di spl ay fl ex to the mai n uni t.
3. Di sconnect the fl ex cabl e from the di spl ay.
4. I nsert the new fl ex cabl e connector i nto the di spl ay connector as
shown i n the fi gure bel ow.
5. Usi ng two fl athead screws from the ki t, secure the fl ex cabl e to the
di spl ay assembl y.
873A
Field replaceable units: Replace display flex assembly
6. Careful l y bend the di spl ay fl ex as shown.
7. Pi ck up and support the di spl ay assembl y between the mai n uni t and
a thi ck book.
8. Use two fl athead screws from the ki t to careful l y secure the fl ex
processor cabl e connector to the mai n processor PCB.
9. Careful l y al i gn and i nsert the DAS cabl e pi ns i nto the DAS assembl y
unti l the snap l atch cl i cks i nto pl ace.
10. Reassembl e the pati ent moni tor i n reverse order of di sassembl y.
874A
875A
2 screws
876A
2 screws
Field replaceable units: Replace display assembly parts
Replace display assembly parts
Use the fol l owi ng procedures to repl ace the di spl ay assembl y parts:
1. Remove or repl ace handl e assembl y on page 7-9.
2. Remove or repl ace di spl ay assembl y on page 7-12.
3. Open di spl ay assembl y on page 7-21.
4. On the fol l owi ng pages fi nd the steps for the part and Dash model
you are servi ci ng:
Repl ace Dash 4000/5000 al arm l i ght on page 7-22.
Repl ace di spl ay i nverter on page 7-23
Repl ace key pad assembl y or Tri m Knob control on page 7-24
Repl ace di spl ay assembl y wi thout LCD on page 7-25
Open display assembly
Fol l ow the steps bel ow for the pati ent moni tor you are servi ci ng.
with display shield flex circuit
Dash 4000 Sharp or 5000 patient
monitor with display assembly
Separate the patient monitor bezel from
the LCD display.
1. Remove four screws holding the display
shield to the LCD display and two
screws holding the display shield to the
patient monitor bezel.
2. Remove the display assembly from the
patient monitor bezel.
3. Pull the LCD display isolator out of the
way. Disconnect the LCD display cable.
501A
4. Disconnect the cable from the backlight
inverter PCB.
502A
Separate the transition bezel from the front
bezel.
1. Remove the two screws from the display
flex cable. Pull up on the latch taps to
remove the flex cable from the display.
2. Remove the six screws from the back of
the transition bezel and the four screws
from the back of the metal display plate.
3. Separate the transition bezel from the
front bezel.
4. Set aside the transition bezel and the
metal display plate.
two smaller screws
four larger screws
500A
LCD display cable
cable
879A
2 screws
six screws
four screws
880A
884A
Replace Dash 4000/5000 alarm light
3. Open the di spl ay assembl y. Refer to page 7-21.
4. Remove the cl ear al arm l i ght l ens.
5. Di sconnect the al arm l i ght cabl e from the al arm l i ght PCB.
6. Remove the defecti ve al arm l i ght PCB and set asi de.
7. I nsert the new al arm l i ght PCB and connect the al arm l i ght cabl e to
the al arm l i ght PCB connector.
8. Veri fy the al arm l i ght jumper i s secured to both J2 pi ns. Refer to step
12 on page 7-16.
9. Re-assembl e the pati ent moni tor i n reverse order.
888A
Replace display inverter
Fol l owi ng steps bel ow for the pati ent moni tor you are servi ci ng.
11. Repl ace the backl i ght i nverter PCB.
12. Reassembl e the di spl ay assembl y i n reverse order.
Dash 4000 Sharp and 5000 patient
1. Flip over the display shield flex circuit.
Remove the male end of the two snap
rivets.
2. Flip over the display shield flex circuit.
Disconnect the display shield cable from
the backlight inverter PCB.
3. Use a screw driver to remove the female
end of the two snap rivets. Do not re-use
these rivets.
1. Open the display assembly. Refer to
page 7-21.
2. Disconnect the cable connectors from
the backlight inverter PCB compression
fittings.
3. Remove the two screws anchoring the
backlight inverter PCB to the display
mounting plate.
plastic snap rivets (male end)
500A
display shield cable
plastic snap rivets (female end)
503A
882A
881A
881A
Replace key pad assembly or Trim Knob control
Fol l owi ng steps bel ow for the pati ent moni tor you are servi ci ng.
4. Pl ace the new key pad assembl y i n the di spl ay bezel . Make sure the
washer tab fi ts i n the retai ni ng sl ot of the Trim Knob control s shaft
and repl ace the 11mm nut.
5. Secure the new key pad wi th the screws.
6. Reassembl e the di spl ay assembl y i n reverse order.
Dash 4000 Sharp patient monitor with
display assembly
1. Remove the rubber knob from the Trim Knob control shaft.
2. Use an 11mm wrench or nut driver to remove the nut holding the Trim Knob controls
shaft to the display bezel.
3. Open the display assembly. Refer to page 7-21.
4. Remove the three screws holding the
key pad assembly to the display bezel.
4. Remove the keypad assembly from the
front bezel.
a. Gently squeeze the latch release and
pull up to disconnect the keypad cable
from the keypad PCB.
b. Remove the four screws anchoring
the mounting plate to the LCD display.
Refer to steps 4b and 4c on page
7-25.
c. Remove the five screws holding the
key pad assembly to the front bezel.
589A
Keypad Assembly
three screws
590A
591A
883A
883A
Replace display assembly without LCD
1. Open the di spl ay assembl y. Refer to page 7-21.
2. Remove the LCD di spl ay. Fol l ow the steps for the pati ent moni tor
you are servi ci ng.
Dash 4000 Sharp and 5000 patient
a. Peel back and remove the rubber
display isolator from around the
display.
b. Go to next step.
a. Disconnect the five cable connectors.
b. Remove the four screws anchoring
the mounting plate to the LCD display.
c. Remove the mounting plate and set
aside.
504A
885A
885A
3. Dampen a cl ean, soft cl oth wi th wi ndow cl eaner and careful l y cl ean
and dry the new LCD di spl ay and the di spl ay fi l ter to remove
fi ngerpri nts and dust parti cl es.
4. I nstal l the new LCD di spl ay and reassembl e the di spl ay assembl y i n
reverse order.
d. Use a 5 mm nut driver to remove the
four stand-off screws anchoring the
display to the rubber display isolator.
e. Lift out the LCD display from the
rubber display isolator and set aside.
886A
887A
Field replaceable units: Replace main unit parts
Replace main unit parts
Use the fol l owi ng procedures to repl ace the mai n uni t parts:
1. Remove or repl ace handl e assembl y on page 7-9.
2. Remove or repl ace di spl ay assembl y on page 7-12.
3. On the fol l owi ng pages fi nd the steps for the part and Dash model
you are servi ci ng:
Repl ace DAS assembl y on page 7-27.
Repl ace NBP pump assembl y on page 7-32.
Repl ace wri ter assembl y or wri ter fl ex on page 7-33.
Repl ace speaker assembl y on page 7-34.
Repl ace CPU/battery housi ng assembl y on page 7-36.
Repl ace power suppl y assembl y on page 7-39.
Replace DAS assembly
WARNING
DAS ASSEMBLY Do not open the DAS assembl y as
thi s breaks the i sol ati on barri er whi ch may resul t i n
pati ent death or seri ous i njury. The DAS assembl y i s a
fi el d repl aceabl e uni t onl y. There are NO fi el d repai rs or
adjustments for the DAS assembl y.
CAUTION
The pati ent moni tor requi res software versi on 5 or l ater
to oper ate wi th the Masi mo SET SPO2 and 4 BP
SuperStat DAS upgrade. I f the i nstal l ati on of software
versi on 5 or l ater i s requi red, GE recommends that you
FI RST i nstal l the software. Then, i nstal l the Masi mo
SET SPO2 and 4 BP SuperStat hardware upgrade.
3. Remove the four screws anchori ng the Data Acqui si ti on System
(DAS) assembl y i n pl ace.
CAUTION
CAREFULLY remove the DAS assembl y so that you do
NOT hi t the components on the CPU/battery housi ng
assembl y.
NOTE
On the Dash 5000 pati ent moni tor the top two screws attach to a
bracket, not the rear housi ng as shown.
4. Remove the DAS assembl y by fi rst pul l i ng the left si de out 1/4-i nch,
then sl i di ng the whol e assembl y out of the pati ent moni tor. I f the
Wi rel ess LAN opti on i s i nstal l ed, use a needl e nose pl i ers to remove
the antennae by di sconnecti ng both coax connectors from the PC
card.
5. Repl ace the DAS assembl y and reassembl e the uni t reversi ng the
order of removal steps.
545A
525A
6. I f you i nstal l ed the Generi c Ohmeda DAS assembl y, pl ace the l abel s
as shown bel ow.
12SL (if software
option was enabled)
861A
BP 1 and BP 2
CO2, NBP, and ECG
NOTE
The BP 1 and BP 2 l abel l ooks si mi l ar to the exampl e bel ow.
862A
7. I f you i nstal l ed the Nel l cor Oxi Max or Masi mo SET SPO2 and 4 BP
SuperStat upgrade, pl ace the l abel s as shown bel ow.
Masimo SET or
Nellcor OxiMax
patent disclosure label
827B
828A
DINAMAP SUPERSTAT
BP 1/3 and BP 2/4
12SL (if software
option was enabled)
CO2, NBP, and ECG
NOTE
The BP 1/3 and BP 2/4 l abel l ooks si mi l ar to the exampl e bel ow.
860A
Replace wireless card
Separate i nstructi ons shi p wi th the ki t for repl aci ng the wi rel ess card.
Pl ease refer to those i nstructi ons i f repl aci ng a wi rel ess card or
upgradi ng to wi rel ess.
Replace NBP pump assembly
1. Remove the DAS assembl y accordi ng to steps starti ng on page 7-27.
2. Remove the four screws and remove the NBP assembl y from the
cover of the DAS assembl y.
3. Di sconnect the tube from the i nner sol enoi d goi ng i nto the NBP
assembl y.
4. Usi ng a smal l , fl at-bl ade screwdri ver, remove the connector from the
NBP assembl y to the DAS assembl y.
Disconnect this end of the tube.
Remove four
screws.
570A
527A
DAS assembly FRU
NBP pump assembly FRU
526A
3
5. Attach the NBP assembl y to the DAS assembl y. Do not forget:
the four mounti ng screws,
the tube connecti on, and
the fl ex connector.
6. Reassembl e the pati ent moni tor i n reverse order.
Replace writer assembly or writer flex
2. Remove the wri ter by unscrewi ng the two capti ve screws i nsi de the
wri ter.
CAUTION
Approach the screw from below the top bar on the paper
rol l hol der so that you do not damage the uni t.
3. Unscrew the thumb screw anchori ng the wri ter cabl e to the mai n
assembl y and di sconnect the fl ex cabl e from the CPU/battery housi ng
assembl y.
NOTE
When securi ng the thumb screw for reassembl y, fi rst fi nger-
ti ghten the thumb screw. Then, use a fl at-head scr ew dri ver to
ti ghten the screw an addi ti onal 1/4 turn.
533A
thumb screw
562B
speaker harness
and alarm light
cable
three writer flex
screws
4. Remove the speaker harness and the opti onal al arm l i ght cabl e
harness from the top of the wri ter board.
5. Remove three screws hol di ng the wri ter fl ex to the wri ter bracket.
6. Repl ace wri ter assembl y and/or wri ter fl ex and reassembl e the
pati ent moni tor i n reverse order .
Replace speaker assembly
2. Remove the wri ter assembl y/wri ter fl ex accordi ng to steps on
page 7-33.
3. Remove the wri ter bracket from the frame by squeezi ng the si des
together.
532A
4. Di sconnect the speaker cabl e connector from the processor board.
5. Remove the four screws anchori ng the speaker to the frame. Remove
the speaker from the uni t.
6. I nstal l the new speaker i n the uni t.
7. Fasten the speaker wi th the four screws.
8. Connect the speaker cabl e connector to the processor board.
NOTE
When securi ng the thumb screw on the wri ter fl ex, fi rst fi nger-
586B
586B
Replace CPU/battery housing assembly
3. I f present, remove the wi rel ess card.
CAUTION
Do not pul l on the 802.11b antennas or use them to
remove the wi rel ess card. They can easi l y be damaged.
a. Careful l y use a needl e nose pl i ers to pul l out the card usi ng the
pul l tab.
b. Careful l y di sconnect the antennas usi ng a pen ti p, smal l
screwdri ver, or needl e nose pl i ers.
c. Pl ace the wi rel ess card i n a safe pl ace.
941A
802.11b card
with pull tab
942A
5. Unscrew the thumb screw anchori ng the wri ter cabl e to the CPU
assembl y and di sconnect the fl ex cabl e from the CPU/battery housi ng
assembl y.
6. Remove the three screws anchori ng the battery door assembl y to the
rear housi ng. Remove the battery door assembl y.
7. I f repl aci ng the battery door onl y, i nstal l the new door and
reassembl e the pati ent moni tor. Otherwi se, conti nue wi th the next
step.
8. Remove the four panhead screws anchori ng the CPU/battery housi ng
assembl y to the frame. These screws are attached at the bottom of
the uni t.
Screws holding battery door.
581B
895A
517A
9. Carefully pul l the CPU/battery housi ng assembl y from the uni t.
10. Remove the pl asti c connector panel from the three connectors at the
back of the CPU/battery housi ng assembl y. I nstal l thi s panel on the
new CPU/battery housi ng assembl y before you sl i de the new
assembl y i nto the rear housi ng.
11. I nstal l the new assembl y i n the uni t.
NOTE
12. I f present, i nstal l the wi rel ess card i nto the new CPU/battery
housi ng assembl y.
CAUTION
Do not pul l on the 802.11b antennas or use force when
connecti ng to the wi rel ess card. Handl e the antennas and
connectors careful l y as they can easi l y be damaged.
a. Connect the antennas to the new card.
b. Wi th antenna connecti on faci ng down, i nstal l the card i nto the
card bracket.
547A
572A
plastic connector panel
14. Be sure to compl ete the fol l owi ng procedures i n Recommended
checkout on page 7-44:
el ectri cal safety tests
checkout procedures
cal i brati on
15. Al so confi gure the pati ent moni tor and enabl e the software opti ons
previ ousl y i nstal l ed. Refer to Confi gurati on on page 4-1.
Replace power supply assembly
1. Remove the CPU/battery housi ng assembl y accordi ng to steps
starti ng on page 7-36.
2. Whi l e hol di ng the power suppl y assembl y wi th one hand, remove the
four screws from the back of the uni t.
3. Remove the assembl y from the uni t.
575A
569A
4. Al i gn the tab on the power suppl y mounti ng br acket wi th the sl ot i n
the rear housi ng and i nstal l the new assembl y i n the uni t. Fasten the
assembl y to the rear housi ng wi th the new screws.
NOTE
slot
tab
576A
Field replaceable units: Replace battery door
Replace battery door
1. Remove the three screws anchori ng the battery door assembl y to the
rear housi ng. Remove the battery door assembl y.
2. I nstal l the new door and reassembl e the pati ent moni tor.
Screws holding battery door.
581B
895A
Field replaceable units: Replace foot
Replace foot
1. Remove four screws hol di ng the foot to the pati ent moni tor.
NOTE
Your uni t may or may not have a mounti ng pl ate. The same four
screws anchor the mounti ng pl ate and foot.
2. Repl ace the foot and screw to the pati ent moni tor.
926A
Field replaceable units: Replace writer cover
Replace writer cover
Dash pati ent moni tors wi thout a wri ter have a bl ank door where the
wri ter assembl y woul d be i nstal l ed. The door snaps i nto the wri ter space
above the battery door.
927A
Field replaceable units: Recommended checkout
Recommended checkout
After reassembl i ng the pati ent moni tor, ALWAYS compl ete the el ectri cal
safety tests, checkout procedures, cal i brati on tests, and regul ar
mai ntenance procedures i denti fi ed and descri bed i n thi s manual .
Recommended calibration, electrical safety tests, and checkout procedures
Replacement
procedure
Calibration
tests
Checkout procedures Electrical safety tests
Display
assembly
Display
assembly
components
Display inverter
assembly
Handle
assembly
None Patient monitor power-up tests on page 8-
17.
Display test on page 8-45.
5 lead ECG test on page 8-18.
Electrical safety tests on page 8-5.
Speaker None Complete ALL the Checkout Procedures in
Checkout on page 8-1.
Keypad
assembly/Trim
Knob
17.
DAS assembly NBP
calibration on
page 8-37.
ECG tests on page 8-18.
Respiration tests on page 8-21.
Temperature tests on page 8-22.
Cardiac output tests on page 8-23.
Invasive blood pressure tests (option) on
page 8-25.
Pulse oximetry tests for GE Ohmeda SPO2
oximeter on page 8-29. Use this procedure if
you installed a GE Ohmeda DAS assembly.
Pulse oximetry tests for Masimo SET SPO2
on page 8-31. Use this procedure if you
installed a Masimo DAS assembly.
Pulse oximetry tests for Nellcor OxiMax
SPO2 on page 8-33. Use this procedure if
you installed a Nellcor OxiMax DAS assembly.
Noninvasive blood pressure tests on page 8-
35.
Refer to the CO2 chapter in the patient
monitors operator manual to checkout the
mainstream End-tidal CO2.
To check out the sidestream End-tidal CO
2
,
refer to the documentation that came with the
module.
NBP assembly NBP
calibration on
page 8-37.
Noninvasive blood pressure tests on page 8-
35.
Electrical safety tests on page 8-5.
Wireless LAN None Patient monitor power-up tests on page 8-
17.
Network test (option) on page 8-46.
Wireless LAN test (option) on page 8-49.
Power supply
assembly
17.
End-tidal CO
2
test (option) on page 8-43.
CPU End-tidal CO
2
test (option) on
page 8-43..
NBP
calibration on
page 8-37.
Patient monitor power-up tests on page 8-
17.
Analog output and defibrillator
synchronization tests on page 8-40.
Graph or print tests on page 8-44.
Speaker test on page 8-45.
Network test (option) on page 8-46.
Wireless LAN test (option) on page 8-49.
RAC 2A module housing peripheral device
test (option) on page 8-52.
Writer, writer
flex
17.
Graph or print tests on page 8-44.
Recommended calibration, electrical safety tests, and checkout procedures
Replacement
procedure
Calibration
tests
Checkout procedures Electrical safety tests
8 Checkout
Checkout: Overview
Overview
Manufacturer recommendations
These safety tests and checkout procedures provi de servi ce personnel
wi th a method to veri fy operati onal and functi onal performance of the
pati ent moni tor. Fai l ure to attai n any of the l i sted resul ts i ndi cates a
potenti al mal functi on of the pati ent moni tor.
The safety tests and checkout procedur es are based on the assumpti on
that the tested pati ent moni tor has known good cabl es and test
equi pment. I t al so r equi res that the user be fami l i ar wi th the operati on
of al l test equi pment requi red for the procedures. For more i nformati on
concerni ng the operati on of these components, refer to the respecti ve
operator manual (s).
Frequency
GE recommends that you perform the checkout procedures:
Upon recei pt of the devi ce.
Every 12 months thereafter.
Each ti me the mai n encl osure i s di sassembl ed or a ci rcui t board i s
removed, tested, or repl aced.
Test equipment
The safety tests and checkout procedures are wri tten for the GE
recommended test equi pment l i sted for each test. I f you use test
equi pment other than those GE recommends, you may need to sl i ghtl y
modi fy some test steps.
Checkout: Maintenance and checkout checklist
Maintenance and checkout checklist
Use the fol l owi ng checkl i st to ensure mai ntenance compl eti on.
Visual inspection on page 5-3
1. General condi ti on
2. Connectors
3. Cabl e i nsul ati on
4. Di spl ay
5. Safety l abel s and i nscri pti on
Cleaning and disinfecting the patient monitor on page 5-3
1. Di spl ay
2. Exteri or surfaces
3. Pri nt head
Battery maintenance on page 5-10
Electrical safety tests on page 8-5
1. Power outl et
2. Power cord and pl ug
3. Ground (earth) i ntegri ty
4. Ground (earth) wi re l eakage
5. Encl osure l eakage test
6. ECG Pati ent (source) l eakage current test
7. SpO
2
Pati ent (source) l eakage current test
8. ECG Pati ent (si nk) l eakage current (mai ns vol tage on the
appl i ed part)
9. BI Sx (opti on) current l eakage test
10. SpO
2
Pati ent (si nk) l eakage current (mai ns vol tage on the
appl i ed part)
Checkout: Maintenance and checkout checklist
Checkout procedures on page 8-16
1. Pati ent moni tor power-up tests on page 8-17
2. ECG tests on page 8-18
3. Respi rati on tests on page 8-21
4. Temperature tests on page 8-22
5. Cardi ac output tests on page 8-23
6. I nvasi ve bl ood pressure tests (opti on) on page 8-25
7. Pul se oxi metry tests for GE Ohmeda SPO2 oxi meter on
page 8-29
8. Pul se oxi metry tests for Masi mo SET SPO2 on page 8-31
9. Pul se oxi metry tests for Nel l cor Oxi Max SPO2 on page 8-33
10. Noni nvasi ve bl ood pressure tests on page 8-35
11. NBP cal i brati on on page 8-37
12. Anal og output and defi bri l l ator synchroni zati on tests on
page 8-40
13. End-ti dal CO
2
test (opti on) on page 8-43
14. Battery tests on page 8-44
15. Graph or pri nt tests on page 8-44
16. Di spl ay test on page 8-45
17. Speaker test on page 8-45
18. Network test (opti on) on page 8-46
19. Remote control test (opti on) on page 8-46
20. BI Sx test (opti on) on page 8-47
21. Wi rel ess LAN test (opti on) on page 8-49
22. Dash Port docki ng stati on test (opti on) on page 8-52
23. RAC 2A modul e housi ng peri pheral devi ce test (opti on) on
page 8-52
24. Data acqui si ti on tests on page 8-53
Checkout: Electrical safety tests
Electrical safety tests
General
El ectri cal safety tests provi de a method of determi ni ng i f potenti al
el ectri cal heal th hazards to the pati ent or operator of the devi ce exi st.
Recommendations
GE recommends that you perform al l safety tests presented i n thi s
chapter.
upon recei pt of the devi ce (pati ent moni tor and i ts associ ated
equi pment),
every twel ve months thereafter, and
each ti me the mai n encl osure i s di sassembl ed or a ci rcui t board i s
removed, tested, repai red, or repl aced.
Record the date and resul ts on the Mai ntenance/Repai r Log i ncl uded at
the end of thi s chapter.
These i nstructi ons are i ntended for every component i n the system. I f the
Tram-rac housi ng does not have i ts own power suppl y, i t shoul d remai n
connected to the pati ent moni tor throughout the safety tests.
WARNING
Fai l ure to i mpl ement a sati sfactory mai ntenance
schedul e may cause undue equi pment fai l ure and
possi bl e heal th hazards. Unl ess you have an Equi pment
Mai ntenance Contract, GE does not i n any manner
assume the responsi bi l i ty for performi ng the
recommended mai ntenance procedures. The sol e
responsi bi l i ty rests wi th the i ndi vi dual or i nsti tuti on
usi ng the equi pment. GE servi ce personnel may, at thei r
di screti on, fol l ow the procedures provi ded i n thi s manual
as a gui de duri ng vi si ts to the equi pment si te.
Test conditions
Perform El ectri cal safety tests under normal ambi ent condi ti ons of
temperature, humi di ty, and pressure.
Test equipment
The recommended test equi pment requi red to perform el ectri cal safety
tests i s l i sted bel ow.
Power outlet test
Veri fy that the power outl et i s wi red correctl y per the countrys el ectri cal
code standard before starti ng the fol l owi ng el ectri cal safety tests. The
resul ts of the fol l owi ng tests wi l l be i naccurate unl ess a properl y wi red
power outl et i s used.
Power cord and plug
Veri fy the power cord bei ng used wi th the pati ent moni tor i s good. The
fol l owi ng are a coupl e of thi ngs to check for i n thi s regard:
Fai l ure of the power cord strai n rel i ef i s very common. Often ti mes
users of the equi pment pul l on the power cord i tsel f, rather than the
power cord pl ug, to unpl ug the pati ent moni tor from a wal l
receptacl e. I f i n doubt, test for conti nui ty through each conductor of
the power cord connector and pl ug.
Veri fy l i ne, neutral , and ground conductors are properl y connected to
the power cord pl ug and are not short-ci rcui ted. Rewi re and ti ghten
these, or repl ace the power cord, as necessary.
Item Specification
Leakage Current Tester Equivalent to the circuits shown
Digital Multimeter (DMM) AC volts, ohms
Ground Bond Tester 0 1 ohm
ECG Test Body All leads together
Masimo SET SPO2 Test Body 2006036-001
GE and Nellcor SPO2 Test Body 2006646-001
Sensor Plus Simulator (for BISx option) 2007695-001 or equivalent
Ground (earth) integrity
Li sted bel ow are two methods for checki ng the ground (earth) i ntegri ty,
Ground Conti nui ty Test and I mpedance of Protecti ve Earth
Connecti on. These tests determi ne whether the devi ce's exposed metal
and power i nl et's earth (ground) connecti on has a power ground faul t
condi ti on.
Perform the test method bel ow that i s requi red by your Country/Local
governi ng safety organi zati on.
Ground continuity test
Compl eti on of thi s test i s checked by the fol l owi ng steps:
1. Di sconnect the devi ce under test from the power outl et.
2. Connect the negati ve (-) l ead of the DMM to the protecti ve earth
termi nal (ground pi n i n power i nl et connector) or the protecti ve earth
pi n i n the Mai ns pl ug (ground pi n i n power cord).
3. Set the DMM to the mi l l i ohm (m) range.
4. Connect the posi ti ve (+) l ead of the DMM to al l exposed metal
surfaces on the devi ce under test. I f the metal surfaces are anodi zed
or pai nted, scrape off a smal l area i n a i nconspi cuous pl ace for the
probe to make contact wi th the metal .
5. Resi stance must read:
0.1 ohm or l ess wi thout power cord
0.2 ohms or l ess wi th power cord
Impedance of protective earth connection
Thi s test unl i ke a ground conti nui ty test wi l l al so stress the ground
system by usi ng speci al ground bond testers.
Thi s test normal l y i s onl y requi red as a manufacturi ng producti on test to
recei ve safety agency compl i ance.
Some country agency's do requi re thi s test after fi el d equi pment repai rs
(e.g., Germany's DI N VDE 0751 standards).
Consul t your country/l ocal safety agency i f i n questi on.
Compl i ance i s checked by the fol l owi ng steps:
1. A current of 25A from a current source wi th a frequency of 50 or 60
Hz wi th a no-l oad vol tage not exceedi ng 6 V i s passed for at l east 5 s
through the protecti ve earth termi nal or the protecti ve earth pi n i n
the mai ns pl ug and each accessi bl e metal part whi ch coul d become
l i ve i n case of fai l ure i n basi c i nsul ati on.
2. The vol tage drop between the parts descri bed i s measured and the
i mpedance determi ned from the current and vol tage drop. I t shal l not
exceed the val ues i ndi cated.
For equi pment wi thout a power suppl y cord the i mpedance between the
protecti ve earth termi nal and any accessi bl e metal part whi ch i s
protecti vel y earthed shal l not exceed 0.1 ohms
For equi pment wi th a power suppl y cord the i mpedance between the
protecti ve earth pi n i n the mai ns pl ug and any accessi bl e metal part
whi ch i s protecti vel y earthed shal l not exceed 0.2 ohms.
When taki ng thi s measurement, move the uni t's power cord around.
There shoul d be no fl uctuati ons i n resi stance.
Ground (earth) wire leakage current tests
Perform thi s test to measure current l eakage through the ground (earth)
wi re of the equi pment duri ng normal operati on.
NOTE
The DMM pl us l eakage tester network shown i s the ci rcui try defi ned
by the I EC/EN/UL 60601-1 standard for measuri ng l eakage current.
1. Confi gure the l eakage tester l i ke the ci rcui t shown bel ow.
2. Connect the power cord of the devi ce under test to the power
receptacl e on the l eakage tester.
3. The devi ce under test i s to be tested at i ts nor mal operati ng vol tage.
4. Set the power swi tch of the devi ce under test to ON.
5. Read the current l eakage i ndi cated on DMM.
6. Set the pol ari ty swi tch on the l eakage tester to RVS (reverse).
NOTE
I f ei ther readi ng i s greater than the appropri ate speci fi cati on
bel ow, the devi ce under test fai l s. Contact GE Medi cal Systems
I nformation Technologies Techni cal Support.
300 A (0.3 vol ts on the DMM), and the devi ce under test i s
powered from 100-120 V/50-60 Hz
powered from a centered-tapped 200-240 V/50-60 Hz, si ngl e
phase ci rcui t
powered from a non-center-tapped, 200-240 V/50-60 Hz, si ngl e-
phase ci rcui t
NOTE
Center-tapped and non-center-tapped suppl y ci rcui ts produce
di fferent l eakage currents and the UL and I EC l i mi ts are
di fferent.
Power Cord
Leakage Tester
NORM
RVS
HIGH
LOW
GND
0.015F
P
o
w
e
r

C
o
r
d
Device
Under
Test
DMM set to measure AC voltage
GND
DMM
10K
1K
8. Set the power swi tch of the devi ce under test to OFF.
Enclosure leakage current test
Perform thi s test to measure current l eakage through exposed conducti ve
surfaces on the devi ce under test duri ng normal operati on.
1. Confi gure the l eakage tester l i ke the ci rcui t shown bel ow wi th GND
swi tch OPEN and pol ari ty swi tch NORM.
2. Connect probe to an unpai nted, non-anodi zed chassi s ground on the
uni t under test (Equi potenti al l ug).
3. Set the power swi tch of the devi ce to ON.
NOTE
Center-tapped and non-center-tapped suppl y ci rcui ts produce
di fferent l eakage currents and the UL and I EC l i mi ts are
di fferent.
5. Set the pol ari ty swi tch to RVS.
NOTE
bel ow, the devi ce under test fai l s. Contact GE Techni cal Support.
powered from 100-120 V/50-60 Hz
powered from a centered-tapped 200-240 V/50-60 Hz, si ngl e
phase ci rcui t
powered from a non-center-tapped, 200-240 V/50-60 Hz, si ngl e-
phase ci rcui t
7. Set the GND swi tch on the l eakage tester to CLOSED.
Power Cord
Leakage Tester
NORM
RVS
HIGH
LOW
GND
1K 0.015F
P
o
w
e
r

C
o
r
d
Device
Under
Test
GND
DMM
Closed
Open
Probe to exposed conductive chassis
10K
9. Set the pol ari ty swi tch to RVS.
NOTE
I f the readi ng i s greater than the speci fi cati on bel ow, and the
devi ce under test i s powered from 100-240 V/50-60 Hz, the devi ce
under test fai l s. Contact GE Techni cal Support.
100 mi croamperes (0.1 vol ts on the DMM), and the devi ce under
test i s powered from 100-240 V/50-60 Hz
11. Set the power swi tch of the devi ce under test to OFF.
Patient (source) leakage current test
Thi s procedure onl y appl i es to Cl ass I (grounded/earthed) equi pment,
and measures the l eakage current from the ECG/RESP connector or the
SPO2 connector of the devi ce to ground.
swi tch OPEN and pol ari ty swi tch NORM.
2. Connect an ECG test body to the ECG/RESP connector of the devi ce
under test.
3. Set the power swi tch of the devi ce to ON.
4. Read the l eakage current i ndi cated on the DMM.
5. Change the l eakage tester pol ar i ty swi tch to the RVS posi ti on.
NOTE
I f ei ther readi ng i s greater than 50 A (0.05 vol ts on the DMM), the
devi ce fai l s thi s test. Contact GE Techni cal Support.
Power Cord
Leakage Tester
NORM
RVS
ECG Test Body
Or SPO2 Test Body
HIGH
LOW
GND
P
o
w
e
r

C
o
r
d
Device
Under
Test
GND
DMM
Closed
0.015F
10K
1K
7. Change the GND swi tch to the Cl osed posi ti on.
9. Change the l eakage current swi tch to the RVS posi ti on.
NOTE
I f ei ther readi ng i s greater than 10 A (0.01 vol ts on the DMM),
the devi ce fai l s thi s test. Contact GE Techni cal Support.
11. Set the power swi tch of the devi ce to OFF.
NOTE
The AAMI and I EC si ngl e faul t condi ti on (ground open) i s 50 A,
whereas the normal condi ti on (ground cl osed) i s l ess.
12. Repeat the steps i n thi s procedure usi ng the appropri ate GE or
Masi mo SET SPO2 Test Body. Connect the SPO2 Test Body to the
bl ue SPO2 connector of the devi ce under test.
Patient (sink) leakage current test (mains voltage on the applied part)
Thi s procedure onl y appl i es to Cl ass I (grounded/earthed) equi pment,
and measures the l eakage current from a mai ns vol tage source i nto the
ECG/RESP connector or the SpO2 connector.
swi tch CLOSED and pol ari ty swi tch NORM.
WARNING
Shock hazard. The fol l owi ng step causes hi gh vol tage at
the test body. Do not touch the test body.
2. Set power swi tch on the devi ce to ON.
3. Read l eakage current i ndi cated on DMM.
Power Cord
Leakage Tester
NORM
RVS
ECG Test Body
or ECG Cable
or SPO2 Test Body
HIGH
LOW
GND
1K
P
o
w
e
r

C
o
r
d
Device
Under
Test
GND
DMM
Closed
(Keep cable length as
short as possible.)
120K
10K
0.015F
NOTE
bel ow, the devi ce under test fai l s. Contact GE Techni cal Support.
10 A (0.01 vol ts on the DMM) at 120 VAC usi ng the test body.
20 A (0.02 vol ts on the DMM) at 240 VAC usi ng the test body.
50 A (0.05 vol ts on the DMM) at 120-240 VAC usi ng the ECG
cabl e.
NOTE
The 10 and 20 A l i mi ts are based on i nternal desi gn
standards. The 50 A l i mi t i s common to al l standards. AAMI
ES-1 standard requi res usi ng the pati ent cabl e.
6. Set the power swi tch on the devi ce to OFF.
7. Repeat the steps i n thi s procedure usi ng the appropri ate GE or
Masi mo SET SPO2 Test Body. Connect the SPO2 Test Body to the
bl ue SPO2 connector of the devi ce under test.
BISx (option) current leakage tests
These procedures test the i ntegri ty of the BI Sx i sol ati on onl y, not the
enti re system.
BISx patient (source) leakage current test
Thi s test checks l eakage current from the pati ent cabl e connector of the
BI Sx to ground.
1. Connect the Sensor Pl us si mul ator to the BI Sx and connect the two
ci rcul ar Sensor Pl us si mul ator connecti ons (test body) to the l eakage
tester.
Sensor Plus simulator circular connections
swi tch OPEN, pol ari ty swi tch NORM and power swi tch OFF.
3. Connect the BI Sx power suppl y cord to the power outl et on the
l eakage tester .
4. Set the l eakage tester power swi tch to ON.
5. Turn the BI Sx ON by connecti ng the AC power adaptor.
8. Read the l eakage current i ndi cated on the DMM
NOTE
I f ei ther readi ng i s greater the 500 A, the BI Sx fai l s thi s test.
Contact GE Techni cal Support.
9. Change the GND swi tch to the CLOSED posi ti on.
12. Read the l eakage current i ndi cated on the DMM
13. Set the power swi tch of the l eakage tester to OFF.
NOTE
Contact GE Tech Support.
The AAMI and the I EC si ngl e faul t condi ti on (ground open) i s
500 A, whereas the normal condi ti on (ground cl osed) i s 100 A.
14. Leave the test confi gurati on set up for the si nk l eakage test.
Power Cord
Leakage Tester
NORM
RVS
Test Body
HIGH
LOW
GND
P
o
w
e
r

C
o
r
d
Device
Under
Test
GND
DMM
Closed
0.015F
10K
1K
BISx patient (sink) leakage current test
Thi s test checks the pati ent cabl e l eakage current from a 115 or 220VAC
source i nto the BI Sx.
1. Wi th the Sensor Pl us si mul ator connected to the BI Sx and the two
ci rcul ar Sensor Pl us si mul ator connecti ons (test body) connected to
the l eakage tester, confi gure the l eakage tester l i ke the ci rcui t shown
bel ow wi th GND swi tch CLOSED, pol ari ty swi tch NORM and power
swi tch OFF.
WARNING
Shock hazard. The fol l owi ng step causes hi gh vol tage at
the test body. Do NOT touch the test body.
2. Set the power swi tch of the l eakage tester to ON.
3. Read l eakage current i ndi cated on the DMM.
6. Set the power swi tch on the l eakage tester to OFF.
NOTE
Contact GE Techni cal Support.
Test completion
1. Di sconnect the l eakage tester from the power outl et.
2. Di sconnect al l test equi pment from the devi ce.
3. Di sconnect the devi ce power cord from the l eakage tester.
Power Cord
Leakage Tester
NORM
RVS
Test Body
HIGH
LOW
GND
1K
P
o
w
e
r

C
o
r
d
Device
Under
Test
GND
DMM
Closed
(Keep cable length as
short as possible.)
120K
10K
0.015F
Checkout: Checkout procedures
Checkout procedures
Frequency
GE recommends that you perform the checkout procedures:
Upon recei pt of the devi ce.
Every 12 months thereafter.
Each ti me the mai n encl osure i s di sassembl ed or a ci rcui t board i s
removed, tested, or repl aced.
Identify enabled patient parameters and software options
The check out procedures support al l enabl ed pati ent parameter and
software opti ons. To vi ew the opti ons enabl ed on the pati ent moni tor, go
to the Mai n Menu and sel ect MORE MENUS > MONI TOR SETUP >
SOFTWARE CONFI GURATI ON.
The fol l owi ng i s a l i st of al l avai l abl e pati ent parameter and software
opti ons.
0BP (i nvasi ve)
1BP or 2BP (i nvasi ve)
3BP or 4BP (i nvasi ve)
12SL
ACI -TI PI
HI -RES TRENDS
ETCO
2
(CO
2
) (End-ti dal CO
2
)
NETWORK
AVOA Pl us
CARDI O-PULMONARY
CARDI AC
Patient monitor power-up tests
NOTE
When the pati ent moni tor i s connected to a docki ng stati on, use the
docki ng stati ons power cabl e i nstead of the pati ent moni tors power
cabl e.
1. Remove the batteri es and unpl ug the pati ent moni tor (or the docki ng
stati on) from AC power to turn the pati ent moni tor off.
2. Restore the batteri es to the pati ent moni tor and pl ug the pati ent
moni tor (or the docki ng stati on) i nto AC power to turn the pati ent
moni tor on.
3. Veri fy al l of the front panel i ndi cators i l l umi nate on power up.
4. Veri fy the AC i ndi cator on the pati ent moni tor stays i l l umi nated.
NOTE
I f the AC LED stays on, but the screen i s bl ank, the pati ent
moni tor i s l i kel y i n standby mode (battery chargi ng). Press the
POWER button to enter the normal mode.
I f the AC i ndi cator i s on, conti nue wi th the tests.
I f ei ther of the CHARGING STATUS i ndi cators i s yel l ow, wai t
for the battery(i es) to ful l y charge and the i ndi cators to
i l l umi nate green. The batteri es may take up to four hours to
charge.
I f the battery fuel gauge di spl ays the word ERROR, the
battery may be asl eep. Refer to Error messages on page 6-5.
5. Veri fy the opti onal al arm i ndi cator l i ghts both red and amber on
power up.
6. Veri fy an audi o Beep sounds at the end of Boot up.
7. Test al l of the front panel keys and the Trim Knob control . Veri fy
that an audi o Beep sounds after each key press.
8. Check battery power for both batteri es.
Unpl ug the pati ent moni tor (or the docki ng stati on) from AC
power and open the battery door. Veri fy one LED i n the battery
compartment i s on (batteri es must have more than 10% charge).
Pul l that battery out and veri fy the other LED l i ghts, thus
i ndi cati ng the uni t i s powered by the other battery.
Rei nstal l battery and pl ug i n pati ent moni tor (or the docki ng
stati on).
ECG tests
Equipment
Use the fol l owi ng equi pment for these tests:
MarqI , MarqI I , or MarqI I I pati ent si mul ator or an equi val ent 12SL
ECG pati ent si mul ator.
Marq-I ECG Si mul ator (no l onger avai l abl e for orderi ng)
MarqI I -KI T (i ncl udes CO i njectate box. No l onger avai l abl e for
orderi ng)
MarqI I I -KI T (i ncl udes CO i njectate box)
ECG pati ent cabl e
ECG l eadwi re set
5 lead ECG test
Perform thi s test i f the pati ent moni tor acqui res 5 l ead ECG data.
1. Set up the pati ent si mul ator as fol l ows.
Heart rate 80 bpm.
Heart rate ampl i tude 1.0 mV.
5-l ead ECG pati ent cabl e properl y attached.
2x gai n for a MarqI , MarqI I , or MarqI I I si mul ator.
2. Attach the ECG pati ent cabl e and ECG l eadwi re set to the ECG/
RESP connector on the pati ent moni tor and the l eadwi re connectors
on the top of the pati ent si mul ator.
3. Admi t the pati ent si mul ator to the pati ent moni tor.
015D
4. Observe the fol l owi ng:
ECG l ead I I i s di spl ayed and i s noi se-free,
Heart rate of 80 1 bpm i s di spl ayed,
Wi th QRS tones enabl ed, an audi bl e tone sounds wi th each R-
Wave (QRS compl ex).
5. Veri fy al l si x ECG l eads are avai l abl e to vi ew and are noi se-free.
6. Sel ect DETECT PACE and set to PACE 2.
7. Sel ect a pacemaker pul se on the si mul ator.
8. Observe the fol l owi ng whi l e you vi ew ECG l eads I , I I , I I I , aVL, aVF,
and AVR:
a P appears above the PVC count i ndi cati ng pacemaker pul se
detecti on i s enabl ed, and
the heart rate sti l l reads 80 1 bpm.
9. Di sabl e pacemaker pul se detecti on on the pati ent moni tor and return
the si mul ator to these condi ti ons:
Heart rate 80 bpm,
Heart rate ampl i tude 1.0 mV,
5-l ead ECG pati ent cabl e properl y attached.
10. Sel ect ECG l ead I I to vi ew i n the top trace posi ti on on the pati ent
moni tor di spl ay.
11. Di sconnect the RA l eadwi re from the pati ent si mul ator.
12. Observe that:
an RA FAI L message appear s on the di spl ay, and
l ead I I I automati cal l y di spl ays i n pl ace of l ead I I i n the top trace
posi ti on.
13. Reconnect the RA l eadwi re to the pati ent si mul ator.
14. I nject a 1-mi l l i vol t cal i brati on si gnal usi ng the pati ent si mul ator and
start a manual graph.
15. Observe that the cal i brati on pul se properl y di spl ays and graphs.
16. Thi s compl etes the 5 Lead ECG test. Leave the ECG pati ent cabl e
connected to ECG/RESP and conti nue to the next steps of these
checkout procedures.
016A
12SL and ACI-TIPI ECG test (option)
Perform thi s test i f your pati ent moni tor uses the 12SL ACI -TI PI ECG
opti on.
1. Set up the pati ent si mul ator as fol l ows:.
Heart rate 80 bpm.
Heart rate ampl i tude 1.0 mV.
12SL ECG pati ent cabl e (5-l eads wi th V l eads) properl y attached.
2x gai n for a MarqI , MarqI I , or MarqI I I si mul ator.
2. Sel ect ECG from the pati ent moni tor menu. Then, sel ect 12 LEAD
ECG ANALYSI S.
3. Veri fy that the pati ent moni tor i s di spl ayi ng 10 noi se-free l eads.
4. Sel ect 12LD ECG NOW. Wai t for the pati ent moni tor to acqui re and
anal yze the data.
5. Sel ect Transmi t-Pri nt.
6. Veri fy the 12SL ECG pri nts at the pri nt l ocati on assi gned i n the
pati ent moni tors Pri nt Setup >12SL Pri nt Locati on.
I f there i s no pri nt l ocati on i s assi gned, an error message appears
on the bottom of the pati ent moni tors di spl ay.
7. Veri fy the ECG i s transmi tted to the MUSE Cardi ovascul ar
I nformati on System. Veri fy the ECG pri nts out correctl y as defi ned
by the MUSE system.
I f no MUSE system i s connected, an error message appears on
the bottom of the pati ent moni tors di spl ay.
8. Del ete thi s test 12SL ECG from the MUSE systems edi t l i st.
Respiration tests
1. Wi th the ECG pati ent cabl e connected to the ECG/RESP connector
of the pati ent moni tor, set up the pati ent si mul ator as fol l ows:
Respi rati on (RESP) basel i ne i mpedance 750 (or 1000 i f
usi ng Marq I I or MarqI I I ),
RESP R 0.5,
RESP l ead sel ect I & I I (or LL i f usi ng Marq I I or MarqI I I ),
RESP rate (respi rati ons per mi nute) 30.
2. Set up the pati ent moni tor as fol l ows:
RESP waveform on,
RESP waveform l ead sel ect l ead I I (RESP waveform deri ved
from ECG l ead I I ).
RESP parameter wi ndow appears on the pati ent moni tor wi th a
readi ng of 30 2 (respi rati ons per mi nute),
RESP waveform appears di storti on-free on the pati ent moni tor.
4. Change the RESP waveform l ead sel ect of the pati ent moni tor to l ead
I (RESP waveform deri ved from ECG l ead I ), LA at the si mul ator.
RESP parameter wi ndow appears on the pati ent moni tor wi th a
readi ng of 30 2 (respi rati ons per mi nute),
RESP waveform appears di storti on-free on the pati ent moni tor.
6. Di sconnect the ECG pati ent cabl e from the ECG/RESP connector of
the pati ent moni tor. Proceed to the next steps i n these checkout
procedures.
Temperature tests
Equipment
700/400 Seri es dual temperature adapter (402015-004)
Temperature si mul ator cabl e for use wi th Marq-I onl y (6770031)
Procedures
1. Set up the pati ent si mul ator for a temperature output of 37C.
2. Attach the temperature adaptor cabl e to the TEMP/CO connector of
the pati ent moni tor.
3. Set the swi tch on the temperature adaptor to the 400 posi ti on.
4. Attach the temperature si mul ator cabl e from the SERIES 400
TEMPERATURE OUTPUT connector of the pati ent si mul ator to
the T1 connector of the temperature adaptor.
5. Veri fy a TEMP parameter wi ndow appears on the pati ent moni tor
di spl ay wi th a T1 readi ng of 37.0 0.4 C.
6. Move the temperature si mul ator cabl e from the T1 connector of the
temperature adaptor to the T2 connector of the temperature adaptor.
7. Veri fy a T2 readi ng of 37.0 0.4 C i n the TEMP parameter wi ndow
on the pati ent moni tor di spl ay.
C/V1
LA
RA
LL
RL
ECG
BLOOD PRESSURE
RESPIRATION
TEMPERATURE
ECTOPIC
SELECT
AMPLITUDE
BASELINE
IMPEDANCE
LEAD SELECT
RATE
POWER
DEGREES
OUTPUT
POLARITY
POS
NEG
0.1
2.0
1.0
0.5
1250
250 750
0.1
2.0
0.5
I & II
III
OFF
ON
104.0 98.6 86.0 F 40 37 30 C
ECT
APNEA
LEAD CONTINUITY SYSTOLE
mV
BPM
OHMS
OHMS
mmHg
160 120 80 40 ECT
B P M
P A C E
VP1 VP2 AVS
POS NEG 200 150 100 50 30 10 0 WAVE
m m H G
APNEA 120 60 30 15 40 37 30 LOW BAT.
B P M
BLOOD PRESSURE 1 120/80
BLOOD PRESSURE 2 30/10
400 SERIES 700
TEMPERATURE
OUTPUT
Temperature Adapter, PN
402015-004
Temperature
Simulator Cable,
PN 6770031
Patient Simulator, PN
MarqI, MarqII, MarqIII
Temp/CO Port
017B
8. Repeat the above procedure usi ng 700 setti ngs on si mul ator and
cabl e.
9. Remove the temperature adaptor and temperature si mul ator cabl e
from the pati ent moni tor and pati ent si mul ator.
Cardiac output tests
Equipment
Cardi ac Output si mul ator I I (900028-001) (no l onger avai l abl e for
orderi ng)
Cardi ac Output cabl e adapter (700092-001)
Cardi ac output testi ng i s di fferent dependi ng on the si mul ator you use.
The Cardi ac Output Si mul ator I I i s no l onger avai l abl e, but i f you
al ready have that si mul ator, use the fi rst secti on to run thi s test.
Otherwi se, go to Test wi th Marq I I or MarqI I I Si mul ator.
Test with cardiac output simulator II
1. Connect the cardi ac output (CO) cabl e adaptor to the TEMP/CO
connector of the pati ent moni tor.
2. Connect a si mul ator cabl e between the CO cabl e adaptor and the CO
si mul ator.
018A
3. Set the CO si mul ator to output bl ood temperature (BT) readi ngs, as
found i n the fol l owi ng tabl e:
4. Veri fy a CO parameter wi ndow appears on the pati ent moni tor
di spl ay wi th correct BT readi ngs as shown i n the tabl e above.
5. Set the CO si mul ator to output i njectate temperature (I T) readi ngs,
as found i n the fol l owi ng tabl e:
6. Veri fy correct I T readi ngs appear on the pati ent moni tor di spl ay, as
shown i n the tabl e above.
7. Di sconnect the CO cabl e adaptor from the TEMP/CO connector of
the pati ent moni tor. Thi s compl etes the CO tests.
Simulator BT setting Patient monitor BT reading range
30.3C 30.1 30.5
35.1C 34.9 35.3
36.0C 35.8 36.2
37.0C 36.8 37.2
41.7C 41.5 41.9
Simulator IT setting Patient monitor IT reading range
0.0C 0.3 +0.3
8.0C 7.7 8.3
15.0C 14.7 15.3
24.0C 23.7 24.3
29.6C 29.3 29.9
Test with Marq II or Marq III simulator
1. Connect the cardi ac output cabl e adapter to the TEMP/CO connector
of the Tram modul e.
2. Connect the cardi ac output adapter to the cardi ac output cabl e
adapter and to the Marq I I or to the MarqI I I si mul ator.
3. At the pati ent moni tor, sel ect MORE MENUS >CO.
4. Set up the pati ent moni tor:
a. Set AUTO MODE: to ON
b. Set I NJ ECT TEMP: to BATH
c. Set SI ZE: to 7
d. Set I NJ ECT VOL: to 10CC
e. Set COMPUTATI ONAL CONSTANT: to 0.540
5. Set the adapter to 0.
6. Turn the si mul ator ON. Sel ect cardi ac output menu correspondi ng to
the i njectate temperature. (e.g., menu #92 for 0, or #95 for 24)
7. When the pati ent moni tor screen di spl ays the message, I NJ ECT
WHEN READY, press Enter on the si mul ator.
8. When computi ng i s compl ete, the CO readi ng shoul d be
approxi matel y 37C at 5 l i ters of bl ood per mi nute 5%.
9. Repeat thi s test wi th the adapter set to 24 and the
COMPUTATI ONAL CONSTANT: set to 0.595.
10. The output shoul d be the same.
Invasive blood pressure tests (option)
Equipment
Bl ood pressure si mul ator adapter cabl e (700095-001)
Dual BP cabl e
The i nvasi ve bl ood pressure (BP) tests provi de a method of veri fi cati on
for both BP connectors (BP1, BP2, BP1/3 and BP2/4) of a pati ent
moni tor equi pped wi th thi s opti onal functi on. Fol l ow these steps:
1. Set up the pati ent si mul ator as fol l ows:
Bl ood pressure (BP) pol ari ty POS, i f requi red.
BP output 0 mmHg.
BP transducer output 5 Vol ts.
BP connector tests
1. Connect the BP si mul ator cabl e from the BLOOD PRESSURE 1 -
120/80 connector of the pati ent si mul ator to the enabl ed BP
connectors you wi l l be testi ng on the pati ent moni tor.
a. To connect to the BP1 or the BP2 connector, see the pi ctures
bel ow.
blood pressure simulator
cable, PN 700095-001
BP2 connector on monitor
cable, PN 700095-001
BP1 connector on monitor
To Connect to the BP2 Connector
patient simulator
To Connect to the BP1 Connector
863A
864A
patient simulator
b. To connect to the BP3 or BP4 connectors, see the pi ctures bel ow.
2. Veri fy the BP parameter wi ndow, waveform l abel , correspondi ng
grati cul es, and waveform appear on the pati ent moni tor di spl ay,
al ong wi th a BP waveform requi ri ng zero reference.
3. Press the ZERO ALL (FUNCTION) key on the front panel of the
pati ent moni tor to zero-reference the BP waveform.
4. Change the pati ent si mul ator BP output to 200 mmHg (240 i f usi ng
the Marq I I or MarqI I I ).
866A
BP1/BP3 connector on monitor
BP2/BP4 connector on monitor
To connect to the BP3 connector
patient simulator
cable, PN 700095-001
To connect to the BP4 connector
BP3
dual BP cable,
PN 2005772-001
cable, PN 700095-001
dual BP cable,
PN 2005772-001
BP1
BP4
BP2
867A
patient simulator
5. Observe a readi ng of 200/200 (200) 4 mmHg (or 240 4 mmHg i f
usi ng the Marq I I or MarqI I I ) i n the BP parameter wi ndow on the
pati ent moni tor di spl ay.
6. Change the pati ent si mul ator BP output to WAVE or to a 120/80
wave form (si mul ated BP waveform).
7. Observe a di storti on-free BP waveform and a readi ng of
approxi matel y 120/80 (93) i n the BP parameter wi ndow on the
pati ent moni tor di spl ay.
8. Di sconnect the BP si mul ator cabl e from the BP connector of the
pati ent moni tor.
9. Compl ete steps for each enabl ed BP connector .
Pulse oximetry tests for GE Ohmeda SPO2 oximeter
Equipment
GEMS-I T SpO
2
si mul ator (408610-001 or equi val ent).
NOTE
The GEMS-I T SPO
2
si mul ator i s onl y compati bl e wi th the
GEMS-I T SPO
2
parameter.
GEMS-I T SpO
2
si mul ator cabl e (700232-004 or equi val ent)
Cl i ni cal Dynami cs SmartSAT
TM
Pul se Oxi metry Anal yzer (or
equi val ent). Contact Cl i ni cal Dynami cs for appropri ate Nel l cor or
Masi mo SET SpO
2
adapter cabl e. However, the si mul ator comes
standard wi th a Nel l cor SpO
2
cabl e.
Fl uke Bi omedi cal s I ndex 2
XL
SpO
2
Si mul ator (or equi val ent). Uses
ei ther a Masi mo SET or Nel l cor SpO
2
fi nger probe pati ent cabl e.
Procedure
1. Set the pul se oxi metry (SpO
2
) si mul ator power swi tch to the OFF
posi ti on.
2. Connect the Nel l cor-styl e SpO
2
si mul ator cabl e between the SpO
2

connector of the pati ent moni tor and the SpO
2
si mul ator.
3. Set the si mul ator as fol l ows:
a. Set the MODE to NELLCOR.
b. Set the SpO
2
% to 99.
c. Set the PRR to 100 beats/mi n.
d. Turn the power ON.
020A
4. Veri fy that the fol l owi ng are di spl ayed at the pati ent moni tor:
A si nusoi dal waveform wi th an SpO
2
l abel .
An SpO
2
% readi ng between 97 100% (97 and 102%).
A PRR readi ng between 97 and 103 beats per mi nute (i t mi ght be
necessary to turn the SpO
2
ON).
5. Test the accuracy of these SPO
2
% setti ngs.
6. Test the accuracy of these PPR setti ngs:
7. Return the si mul ator to these condi ti ons:
Set the SpO
2
% to 99.
Set the PPR to 100 beats/mi n.
8. Press the NOISE TEST button ON the si mul ator for 30 seconds.
9. Make sure the pati ent moni tor sti l l di spl ays an SpO
2
val ue between
97 and 100% (97 and 102%), or an i nterference detecti on message i s
di spl ayed.
10. Turn the si mul ator OFF.
11. Di sconnect the si mul ator cabl e from the devi ce under test.
Accuracy of SpO
2
settings
Simulator setting Displayed SpO
2
value
99% (Both types) 97 100% (97 102%)
80.3% (84%) 78 82% (81 87%)
49.7 (63%) 48 52% (61 65%)
Accuracy of PPR settings
Simulator setting Displayed PPR value
70 68 72
100 97 103
160 156 164
Pulse oximetry tests for Masimo SET SPO2
Equipment
Masi mo SpO
2
Test Ki t (2021087-001). I ncl udes Masi mo Tester and
SP02 Sensor Adapter Cabl e.
NOTE
The Masi mo Tester i s i ntended for use onl y wi th Masi mo
i nstruments or i nstruments contai ni ng Masi mo SET oxi metry
wi th standard Masi mo PC Seri es pati ent cabl e connectors. See
the Masi mo Di recti ons for Use that came wi th the Tester for
more i nformati on
The PPR and SP02 val ues for the Masi mo Tester must be wi thi n
these l i mi ts: Per i pher al pul se r ate: 61 bpm 1 bpm; and SPO2
val ue: 81% 3%.
TM
Masi mo SET SpO
2
2
cabl e.
XL
SpO
2
2
Procedures
1. Connect the Masi mo-styl e SPO
2
si mul ator cabl e between the SPO2
connector of the pati ent moni tor and the SPO
2
si mul ator.
2. Turn on the pati ent moni tor.
824C
3. Veri fy the fol l owi ng are di spl ayed at the pati ent moni tor: (I t mi ght be
necessary to turn the SPO
2
parameter on.)
A waveform wi th an SpO
2
l abel .
An SPO
2
% readi ng between 78 - 84%.
A PRR readi ng between 60 and 62 beats per mi nute.
4. Di sconnect the si mul ator cabl e from the modul e.
Pulse oximetry tests for Nellcor OxiMax SPO2
Equipment
Nel l cor SRC-MAX SpO
2
Si mul ator (2007650-002).
NOTE
The Nel l cor SRC-MAX SPO
2
Si mul ator i s onl y compati bl e wi th
the Nel l cor SPO
2
parameter.
TM
Masi mo SET SpO
2
2
cabl e.
XL
SpO
2
2
Procedures
1. Veri fy that 2 AA al kal i ne batteri es are i nstal l ed i n the SRC-MAX
Nel l cor Pul se Oxi metry functi onal tester.
2. Connect the SRC-MAX Nel l cor Pul se Oxi metry functi onal tester to
the 9-pi n end of sensor connector from the DASH. Make sure the
DASH i s powered.
3. Veri fy that the I R LED and RED LED dri ve i ndi cators are both l i t on
the SRC-MAX.
SpO
2
Port.
Nellcor SpO
2
cable.
Nellcor compatible
SpO
2
Simulator.
892A
4. Veri fy the SRC-MAX defaul t i ndi cators are set as fol l ows:
HEART RATE = 60 bpm
LI GHT = LOW
%SpO2 = 75
MODULATI ON = LOW
Al l ow the DASH a few seconds to obtai n a steady readi ng.
5. Veri fy the fol l owi ng SpO2 readi ngs on the DASH for saturati on and
pul se rate:
Saturati on (%): 75 2
Rate (bpm): 60 2
6. Press and rel ease the HEART RATE swi tch and veri fy the SRC-
MAX defaul t i ndi cators are l i t as fol l ows:
HEART RATE = 200 bpm
LI GHT = LOW
%SpO2 = 75
MODULATI ON = LOW
pul se rate:
Rate (bpm): 200 3% (194 to 206)
8. Press and rel ease the LIGHT swi tch and veri fy the SRC-MAX
defaul t i ndi cators are l i t as fol l ows:
LI GHT = HI GH
%SpO2 = 75
MODULATI ON = LOW
pul se rate:
-Saturati on (%): 75 2
-Rate (bpm): 200 3% (194 to 206)
10. Press and rel ease the %SpO2 swi tch and veri fy the SRC-MAX
defaul t i ndi cators are l i t as fol l ows:
LI GHT = HI GH
%SpO2 = 90
MODULATI ON = LOW
pul se rate:
Rate (bpm): 200 3% (194 to 206)
12. Press and rel ease the 8h
13. swi tch and veri fy the SRC-MAX defaul t i ndi cators are l i t as fol l ows:
LI GHT = HI GH
%SpO2 = 90
MODULATI ON = HI GH
14. Veri fy the fol l owi ng SpO2 readi ngs on the pati ent moni tor for
saturati on and pul se rate:
Rate (bpm): 200 3% (194 to 206)
Noninvasive blood pressure tests
Equipment
NBP cuff coupl i ng (400787-001)
NBP hose coupl i ng (46100-002)
NBP tee (4745-101)
NBP tubi ng 2 feet (401582-001)
Manometer: mercury, di gi tal (Sensym PDM200M no l onger
avai l abl e for orderi ng, Meri am I nstrument Smart Manometer Model
350 DM2000, or equi val ent)
NBP tube (414873-001)
NBP cuff (9461-301)
Pi pe: PVC
Procedures
1. Attach the di gi tal manometer, noni nvasi ve bl ood pressure (NBP)
cuff, tees and tubi ng, as shown i n the i l l ustrati on bel ow, to the NBP
connector of the pati ent moni tor.
2. Set the di gi tal manometer power swi tch to the on posi ti on.
3. Set the di gi tal manometer range swi tch to 1000 mmHg.
Usi ng the Trim Knob control , access the Servi ce Mode menu starti ng
from the Mai n Menu.
0407).
3. Sel ect CALI BRATE >CALI BRATE NBP >CHECK CAL OFF >
START.
The text on the menu i tem changes from CHECK CAL OFF to
CHECK CAL I N PROGRESS.
6-inch diameter PVC
pipe (or 1-pound coffee
can):
Wrap the NBP cuff
around this for tests.
NBP cuff,
pn 9461-301:
Any size NBP cuff
will be sufficient.
NBP tubing,
pn 9461-203.
Manometer tubing,
pn 401582-001:
Approximately two
feet in length.
Digital manometer,
Sensym PDM200M or
equivalent:
Note: A calibrated
mercury manometer
may be substituted.
Coupling,
pn 400787-001:
Connects manometer
tubing to NBP cuff
tubing.
Coupling,
pn 46100-002:
Connects manometer
tubing to NBP tubing.
3-way tee,
pn 4745-101: Connects
manometer tubing, NBP
tubing and NBP cuff
tubing.
NBP Port.
021A
Veri fy the readi ngs i n the NBP parameter wi ndow on the pati ent
moni tor di spl ay and readi ngs on the di gi tal manometer are equal ( 1
mmHg) for at l east one ful l mi nute. I f the readi ngs are not equal for
at l east one ful l mi nute, the NBP ci rcui t requi res cal i brati on. See
NBP cal i brati on on page 8-37.
1
4. Sel ect CHECK CAL I N PROGRESS >STOP.
The pneumati c control ci rcui t of the pati ent moni tor vents ai r
pressure i n the pneumati c ci rcui t of the pati ent moni tor to
atmosphere and causes the NBP cuff to defl ate.
1
5. Remove the NBP test setup apparatus from the pati ent moni tor. The
NBP tests are compl ete.
NBP calibration
The overal l accuracy of noni nvasi ve bl ood pressure (NBP) readi ngs by
the pati ent moni tor depend on the fol l owi ng:
the zero pressure readi ng, and
the vol tage span of the NBP sensor i n the pati ent moni tor .
Thi s procedure provi des a method of veri fyi ng these i tems are accurate
and al so checks the NBP pneumati c ci rcui t pl umbi ng for l eaks.
WARNING
When the NBP cuff i s used i n thi s procedure, i t must be
ti ghtl y wrapped around a ri gi d cyl i nder or pi pe. Do not
put the NBP cuff around a human arm duri ng the
cal i brati on procedures due to the potenti al for i njury.
Calibration procedure
0407).
3. Sel ect CALI BRATE >CALI BRATE NBP >CAL ZERO OFF >
START.
4. The text on the menu i tem changes from Cal Zero Off to Cal Zero I n
Progress.
When the process i s compl ete, the menu i tem shows that i t i s OFF
agai n.
Gain calibration test
NOTE
To proceed wi th the Gai n Cal i brati on Test, setup the pati ent moni tor
and test equi pment fol l owi ng the gui del i nes i n the NBP Checkout
Procedure,Checkout procedures on page 8-16.
1. Connect a cuff and manometer to the pati ent moni tor.
2. Turn the di gi tal manometer on and adjust the range swi tch to 1000
mmHg.
3. Sel ect CAL GAI N OFF >CAL GAI N OFF >START.
4. The second l i ne of text on the Cal Gai n menu i tem changes from Cal
Gai n Hol di ng to Cal Gai n I nfl ati ng. The pati ent moni tor starts
pumpi ng up the pressure bul b or cuffthe audi bl e whi rri ng sound of
the NBP pump motors occurs and an i ncrease i n di spl ayed pressures
on both the pati ent moni tor and the manometer can be observed.
5. The pump shuts off at about 250 mmHg, and the pressure drops
sl owl y to about 240 mmHg before stabi l i zi ng. The second l i ne of text
on the Cal Gai n menu i tem changes from I nfl ati ng back to Hol di ng. I f
the pressure conti nues to drop at a rate of 1 mmHg or more for every
fi ve seconds, there i s a l eak i n the NBP pl umbi ng. I f there i s a l eak i n
the NBP pl umbi ng, repai r i t and restart thi s cal i brati on procedure.
6. Sel ect ENTER CAL PRESSURE and use the Trim Knob control to
sel ect a pressure val ue that i s 1 mmHg l ower than the current
manometer readi ng. When the manometer fal l s to exactl y the val ue
that you sel ected i n the pop-up wi ndow, press the Trim Knob
control to enter the val ue.
7. Sel ect CHECK CAL OFF >START.
8. The text on the menu i tem changes from Check Cal Off to Check Cal
I n Progress. Veri fy the pressure readi ngs (shown as Cuff i n the NBP
parameter box) on the pati ent moni tor and manometer are equal ( 1
mmHg) for at least one ful l mi nute.
9. Sel ect CHECK CAL I N PROGRESS >STOP. The pati ent moni tor
automati cal l y rel eases pneumati c pressure i n the enti re pl umbi ng
ci rcui t.
1
10. Unpl ug the pati ent moni tor from AC power source and remove the
test apparatus from the pati ent moni tor.
028B
029B
Analog output and defibrillator synchronization tests
Equipment
Osci l l oscope
5.5 di gi t preci si on vol tmeter (HP34401A, or equi val ent)
Anal og output cabl e (2000633-001)
Setup
1. Use the fi gure bel ow as a reference for connecti ng the osci l l oscope to
the DEFIB SYNC connector, l ocated on the back panel of the pati ent
moni tor, for performi ng these tests.
2. Test the ECG, Arteri al BP, and Marker Out si gnal s from the DEFIB
SYNC connector. They shoul d cl osel y resembl e the waveforms i n the
fi gures bel ow.
DEFIB Sync connector: ECG
Si gnal Pi n:7
Ground Pi n:3
Probe Type:x10
Ti me/Di vi si on:0.2S
Vol ts/Di vi si on:0.5V
DEFIB Sync connector: arterial BP
Si gnal Pi n:6
Ground Pi n:5
Probe Type:x10
Vol ts/Di vi si on:0.2V
022A
023A
024A
There are two Marker Out traces shown bel ow. The upper Marker Out
fi gure references the frequency aspects of the si gnal . The l ower Marker
Out fi gure references the pul se wi dth aspects of the si gnal .
NOTE
The Marker Out ampl i tude and the pul se wi dth are confi gured i n the
boot menu as descri bed i n the confi gurati on chapter. The fol l owi ng
two graphs i ndi cate an ampl i tude of 5V and a pul se wi dth of 10ms.
DEFIB Sync connector: Marker Out (frequency)
Si gnal Pi n:1
Ground Pi n:4
Probe Type:x10
Vol ts/Di vi si on:1V
DEFIB Sync connector: Marker Out (pulse width)
Si gnal Pi n:1
Ground Pi n:4
Probe Type:x10
Ti me/Di vi si on:5mS
Vol ts/Di vi si on:1V
025A
026A
3. Attach a jumper wi re between pi n-1 (Marker Out) and pi n-2 (Marker
I n) of the DEFIB SYNC connector l ocated on the back of the pati ent
moni tor. Veri fy negati ve spi kes i n each of the QRS Compl ex (ECG
waveform) R-Waves on the pati ent moni tor di spl ay, si mi l ar to those
shown i n the i l l ustrati on bel ow.
4. Remove the jumper wi re i nstal l ed i n the previ ous step, from the
DEFIB SYNC connector. Thi s compl etes the defi bri l l ator
synchroni zati on tests.
ECG or BP calibration
To compl ete the ECG or BP cal i brati on, connect a vol tmeter to the
pati ent moni tor.
1. Attach the anal og output cabl e (pn 2000633-001) to the pati ent
moni tor.
2. Connect a 5.5 di gi t preci si on vol tmeter (such as HP34401A, or
equi val ent) to the port pi n to be cal i brated (I f ECG: Pi n 7 = ECG
si gnal , Pi n 3 = ground. I f BP: Pi n 6 = BP, Pi n 5 = ground.).
3. Access the pati ent moni tors Servi ce Mode
4. Cal i brate the ECG or the BP parameters as fol l ows.
ECG calibration
0407).
3. Sel ect CALI BRATE >CAL ECG ANALOG OUT >SET ECG LOW.
027A
022A
4. Adjust the count for 9.0 V 5 mV on the meter and press the Trim
Knob control .
5. Sel ect SET ECG HI GH.
6. Adjust the count for +9.0 V 5 mV on the meter and press the Trim
Knob control .
7. Sel ect SET ECG ZERO.
Adjust the count for 0.0 V 5 mV on the meter and press the Trim
Knob control .
8. Sel ect CONFI RM ECG CAL to confi rm or abort the cal i brati on
BP calibration
0407).
3. Sel ect CALI BRATE >CAL BP ANALOG OUT >SET BP LOW.
4. Adjust the count for 9.0 V 5 mV on the meter and press the Trim
Knob control .
5. Sel ect SET BP HI GH.
6. Adjust the count for +9.0 V 5 mV on the meter and press the Trim
Knob control .
7. Sel ect SET BP ZERO. Adjust the count for 0.0 V 5 mV on the
meter and press the Trim Knob control .
8. Sel ect CONFI RM BP CAL to confi rm or abort the cal i brati on
End-tidal CO
2
test (option)
To veri fy the mai nstream end-ti dal CO2, refer to the CO2 chapter i n the
Dash 3000/4000/5000 Pati ent Moni tor Operators Manual . Thi s test
requi res you perform a zero and reference check by usi ng the sampl e
cel l s provi ded on the end-ti dal CO2 cabl e.
For i nstructi ons on veri fyi ng si destream end-ti dal CO2 and setti ng the
sampl e l i ne to zero, refer to the CO2 modul e operator i nstructi ons.
Battery tests
1. Di sconnect the power cord pl ug from the power outl et.
2. Veri fy the BATTERY front panel i ndi cator l i ghts. Thi s i ndi cates
operati on from the pati ent moni tors battery power.
3. Setup the pati ent si mul ator as fol l ows:
ECG heart rate 80 bpm,
ECG ampl i tude 1.0 mV,
5-l ead pati ent cabl e attached.
ECG Lead I I i s di spl ayed and i s noi se-free,
Heart rate of 80 1 bpm i s di spl ayed,
Wi th QRS VOLUME enabl ed, an audi bl e tone sounds wi th each
R-Wave.
5. Veri fy al l si x ECG l eads are sel ectabl e for di spl ay on the pati ent
moni tor.
6. Connect the power cord pl ug to the power outl et.
7. Veri fy the AC front panel i ndi cator l i ghts. Thi s i ndi cates the pati ent
moni tor i s operati ng from power outl et (AC) power.
8. Veri fy the CHARGING STATUS front panel i ndi cator l i ghts for a
few mi nutes.
An amber gl ow i ndi cates the pati ent moni tor battery i s chargi ng.
A green gl ow i ndi cates the pati ent moni tor batteri es are ful l y
charged.
Graph or print tests
Communication Confirmation
Confi rm communi cati on across the network as fol l ows.
1. Admi t and generate a waveform at the pati ent moni tor wi th a
si mul ator.
2. Press Print and observe graph output at chosen l ocati ons.
Test pattern
0407).
3. Sel ect PRI NT (or GRAPH) TEST PATTERN >START.
4. Veri fy the fol l owi ng:
Fonts
Shadi ng
Tri angl e Pattern
No mi ssi ng dots
5. Sel ect PRI NT (or GRAPH) TEST PATTERN >STOP.
Graph speed
Usi ng the Trim Knob control , access the Graph Setup menu starti ng
1. Sel ect MORE MENUS >MONI TOR SETUP >PRI NT (or
GRAPH) SETUP.
2. Sel ect SPEED:25 (defaul t).
3. Veri fy that al l ei ght speeds work.
Display test
1. Hol d the NBP Auto and the ZERO ALL keys and press the Trim
Knob control at the same ti me.
2. Rel ease the Trim Knob control i mmedi atel y.
3. Conti nue hol di ng the NBP Auto and the ZERO ALL keys.
4. Sel ect Vi deo Test Screens.
5. Test al l screens:
Whi te Scr een.
Red Screen.
Bl ue Screen.
Green Screen.
Verti cal Bars.
Speaker test
1. Change the al arm vol ume of the pati ent moni tor to 100%.
2. Veri fy the speaker vol ume of the pati ent moni tor changes
accordi ngl y.
3. Return the vol ume of the pati ent moni tor to the l evel i t was
previ ousl y set to, before you changed i t for thi s test.
Network test (option)
1. Veri fy that the pati ent moni tor i s connected to the Uni ty Network
MC (Mi ssi on Cri ti cal ) network.
NOTE
When the pati ent moni tor i s connected to a docki ng stati on,
veri fy the docki ng stati on i s connected to the Uni ty Network MC
network.
NOTE
When the pati ent moni tor i s connected to a docki ng stati on, the
pati ent moni tors network port i s di sabl ed. Onl y the docki ng
stati ons network port i s enabl ed at thi s ti me.
2. Sel ect VI EW OTHER PATI ENTS.
3. Sel ect SELECT ANOTHER CARE UNI T.
4. Veri fy that you can see at l east one care uni t.
5. Sel ect a care uni t.
6. Sel ect SELECT A BED TO VI EW.
7. Sel ect a bed.
8. Veri fy that the pati ent wi ndow appears on the pati ent moni tors
spl i t-screen.
Remote control test (option)
1. Veri fy the remote control i s connected i nto an Autoport to M-Port
adapter and i s i nserted i nto the Aux connector.
2. Sel ect MORE MENUS >MONI TOR SETUP >
REVI SI ON AND I D.
3. Sel ect NEXT from the popup menu to di spl ay the port connectors.
4. Veri fy the Remote Control l abel appears after the appropri ate port
and the software versi on for the remote control i s 1A.
5. Press each remote control key and veri fy a beep tone sounds at the
pati ent moni tor.
BISx test (option)
Before performi ng these procedures, compl ete the fol l owi ng El ectri cal
Safety tests for the BI Sx modul e.
Ground (earth) wi re l eakage current tests on page 8-9
BI Sx pati ent (source) l eakage current test on page 8-13
BI Sx pati ent (si nk) l eakage current test on page 8-15
Equipment
Use the fol l owi ng equi pment for thi s test:
BI Sx wi th i ntegrated host pati ent moni tor cabl e and Pati ent
I nterface Cabl e (PI C+)
BI Sx adapter Y-cabl e assembl y 2026830-001
Ethernet patch cabl e 2011129-001
Power suppl y wi th power cord
Sensor Pl us Si mul ator (2007695-001 or equi val ent)
Procedure
1. See the di agram bel ow and connect the BI Sx as fol l ows:.
a. Connect the BI Sx host pati ent moni tor cabl e to the BI Sx adapter
Y-cabl e assembl y.
b. Connect one end of the Y to the power suppl y and the other to the
Ethernet patch cabl e.
c. Connect the Ethernet patch cabl e to the Aux port connector on
the Dash pati ent moni tor.
d. Connect the power suppl y to an AC power source.
The BI S parameter wi ndow appears. The prompt, CONNECT
SENSOR di spl ays i n the parameter wi ndow.
2. Connect the Pati ent I nterface Cabl e (PI C) to the Sensor Pl us
Si mul ator.
The message SENSOR CHECK I N PROCESS di spl ays i n the
parameter wi ndow.
3. Sel ect the BI S parameter bl ock to open the BI S parameter menu.
PIC+
cable
Simulator
Adapter
Y-cable
Aux port
Dash patient
monitor
Ethernet
patch cable
Power supply
Host
monitor
cable
4. From the BI S parameter menu, sel ect the SENSOR CHECK menu
opti on. An i nfor mati on wi ndow opens wi th the i mpedance data. For
exampl e:
5. Veri fy that the i mpedance val ues di spl ayed i n the i nformati on
wi ndow fal l wi thi n the range shown bel ow.
LEAD IMPEDANCE STATUS
1 4.8 PASS
2 14.0 PASS
3 2.3 PASS
4 3.3 PASS
Electrode #
Acceptance range
in Kohms
1 46
2 817
3 24
4 35
Wireless LAN test (option)
Purpose
These procedures check the pati ent moni tor for wi rel ess communi cati on.
Whi l e movi ng a rol l -stand wi th a wi rel ess pati ent moni tor from edge to
edge of the predetermi ned wi rel ess network coverage area, check for the
fol l owi ng at the edges of the wi r el ess network:
the SI GNAL QUALI TY i s equal to or greater than 20,
the TRANSMI T RATE i s equal to or greater than 5.5, and
a constant waveform from a stati onary wi rel ess/wi red pati ent
moni tor di spl ays wi thout any l oss of waveform.
NOTE
Thi s i s a veri fi cati on of the pati ent moni tor and must not substi tute a
professi onal si te survey, i nstal l ati on and veri fi cati on of the areas
desi gned for the wi rel ess network. The connecti vi ty and coverage of
the wi rel ess network i s veri fi ed through the SI GNAL QUALI TY
status and TRANSMI T RATE status i n the wi rel ess pati ent
moni tor.
Equipment
Use the fol l owi ng equi pment and i nformati on for thi s test:
Battery powered wi rel ess Dash pati ent moni tor
Rol l -stand
Stati onary wi rel ess/wi red pati ent moni tor
MarqI , MarqI I , or MarqI I I pati ent si mul ator or an equi val ent ECG
pati ent si mul ator.
Contact the hospi tal I T department to get
access poi nt setti ngs for SSI D and SECURI TY, and
wi rel ess network coverage area.
Procedures
1. Connect the pati ent si mul ator to the stati onary wi rel ess/wi red
pati ent moni tor and generate a waveform.
2. Admi t the stati onary wi rel ess/wi red pati ent moni tor to the Uni ty
Network MC Network.
3. Pl ace the battery powered wi rel ess Dash pati ent moni tor on the rol l -
stand and confi gure i t to communi cate wi th the wi rel ess network as
fol l ows:
a. On the pati ent moni tor, sel ect MORE MENU>MONI TOR
SETUP >SERVI CE MODE.
b. Enter the password.
c. Sel ect MONI TOR SETTI NGS>CONFI GURE WI RELESS
LAN.
d. Ensure that the SSI D and SECURI TY match the wi rel ess
network.
4. The di agram bel ow i s an exampl e of a predetermi ned coverage area
of the wi rel ess network. Rol l the stand to the fi rst edge (EG1).
5. At the battery powered pati ent moni tor, sel ect MONI TOR SETUP >
SERVI CE MODE.
6. Enter the password.
Wireless
coverage
boundary
7. Sel ect MONI TOR SETTI NGS >WI RELESS LAN STATUS.
8. Veri fy that
a. the SI GNAL QUALI TY status i s equal to or greater than 20,
and
b. the TRANSMI T RATE status i s equal to or greater than 5.5.
I f the SI GNAL QUALI TY i s l ess than 20 and/or the TRANSMI T
RATE i s l ess than 5.5, contact the hospi tal I T department to check
for radi o i nterference and veri fy that the access poi nt's radi o
transmi ssi on i s operati ng opti mal l y.
9. Cl ose the WI RELESS LAN STATUS wi ndow.
10. Confi gure the battery powered pati ent moni tor to vi ew the stati onary
pati ent moni tor's waveform as fol l ows:
a. On the pati ent moni tor, sel ect MORE MENU>VI EW OTHER
PATI ENTS >SELECT ANOTHER CARE UNI T.
b. Sel ect the appropri ate uni t.
c. Sel ect SELECT A BED TO VI EW.
d. Sel ect the appropri ate bed.
11. Veri fy that the waveform di spl ays wi thout any l osses.
12. Go to the next edge whi l e moni tori ng the waveform.
13. Veri fy that the waveform di spl ays wi thout any l osses.
14. Repeat steps 5 through 13 for al l edges i denti fi ed.
I f a waveform gap or l oss was spotted on the di spl ay, contact the
hospi tal I T department to check for radi o i nterference and veri fy that
the access poi nt's r adi o transmi ssi on i s operati ng opti mal l y.
NOTE
I f you wal k outsi de the cover age area ther e i s no al arm or
di spl ayed i ndi cati on that you have done so.
934A
Dash Port docking station test (option)
When the pati ent moni tor i s connected to the docki ng stati on, perform
ALL the tests descri bed i n El ectri cal safety tests starti ng on page 8-5.
Operation
Compl ete the Checkout Procedures l ocated i n the Dash Port Docki ng
Stati on Servi ce Manual .
RAC 2A module housing peripheral device test (option)
Because the RAC 2A modul e housi ng has a separate power suppl y,
perform el ectri cal safety tests separate from the pati ent moni tor.
Refer to the El ectri cal safety tests secti on of thi s chapter and compl ete
the fol l owi ng tests.
1. Power outl et test
2. Ground (earth) conti nui ty test,
3. Ground (earth) wi re l eakage tests, and
4. Encl osure l eakage current test.
Operation
Compl ete the Mai ntenance Schedul e procedures found i n the RAC 2A
Modul e Housi ng Servi ce Manual .
Checkout: Data acquisition tests
Data acquisition tests
ECG functions
1. Connect the Mul ti functi on Mi crosi mul ator (pn MARQI I or MARQI I I )
and appropri ate pati ent cabl es, to the ECG connector of the pati ent
moni tor. Turn the pati ent moni tor and the pati ent si mul ator on.
2. Set the pati ent moni tor to di spl ay l eads I , I I , I I I , and V
si mul taneousl y:
a. From the mai n menu, sel ect DI SPLAY OPTI ONS.
b. Make sure the Di spl ay menu i tem shows I ndi vi dual pl us si x
waveforms. I f i t shows Ful l , change i t to I ndi vi dual .
c. Sel ect WAVEFORMS ON/OFF from the menu.
d. Set the di spl ayed waveforms for the fol l owi ng ECG l eads:
3. Set the pati ent si mul ator to output cal i brati on (cal ) pul ses at 1.0 mV.
4. Measure the cal pul se ( ) ampl i tude. These shoul d be (+/20%):
Lead I :0.5 mV
Lead I I :1 mV
Lead I I I :0.5 mV
Lead V:0.5 mV
5. I t may be necessary to run a graph to accuratel y measure the cal
pul ses. Perform these steps to graph al l four waveforms.
a. From the mai n menu, sel ect GRAPH & ALARMS.
b. Sel ect GRAPH CONTROL from the menu.
c. Set the graphed waveforms for the fol l owi ng ECG l eads:
d. Press the Graph Go/Stop (Print on Dash 5000) front panel
control on the pati ent moni tor to start and stop a manual graph.
ECG 1 WAVEFORM 2 WAVEFORM 3 WAVEFORM 4
LEAD II LEAD V LEAD I LEAD III
ECG 1 WAVEFORM 2 WAVEFORM 3 WAVEFORM 4
LEAD II LEAD V LEAD I LEAD III
e. Compare the pri nted graph wi th the sampl e shown bel ow.
f. Change the pati ent si mul ator output from cal pul ses to an 80-
bpm ECG waveform.
The di spl ayed ECG waveforms shoul d be si mi l ar to those shown
i n the fi gure bel ow.
I f thi s i s the case, the ECG functi ons of the acqui si ti on PCB, as
wel l as communi cati on between the acqui si ti on and processor
PCBs functi on as desi gned.
1
ECG waveforms display incorrectly
1. I f the cal i brati on pul ses are NOT correct, test the pati ent si mul ator
usi ng a worki ng pati ent moni tor. I f the pati ent si mul ator functi ons
as desi gned, cal i brate the acqui si ti on PCB. Refer to ECG tests on
page 8-18
2. I f di spl ayed ECG waveforms contai n a si gni fi cant amount of noi se,
check the ECG pati ent cabl es.
3. Test the pati ent si mul ator and ECG pati ent cabl es on a worki ng
pati ent moni tor to veri fy the ECG si gnal .
4. I f the ECG si gnal , pati ent si mul ator and ECG pati ent cabl es are
good, the acqui si ti on PCB i s suspect and you need to repl ace i t.
031A
040A
535A
ECG waveforms do not display at all
1. Test the ECG pati ent cabl es on a wor ki ng pati ent moni tor .
2. Test the pati ent si mul ator on a worki ng pati ent moni tor.
3. Swap the acqui si ti on PCB i nto a worki ng pati ent moni tor. I f the
symptoms fol l ow the PCB i nto the worki ng pati ent moni tor, repl ace
the acqui si ti on PCB.
4. I f none of these fi rst three steps provi de any resul ts, swap the
processor PCB and/or power suppl y PCB i nto a worki ng pati ent
moni tor.
Lead fail functions
1. Wi th the pati ent moni tor di spl ayi ng l eads I , I I , I I I , and V from the
pati ent si mul ator, remove the RA l eadwi re from the pati ent
si mul ator.
2. The pati ent moni tor shoul d di spl ay a warni ng of a RA FAI L message.
Lead fai l detecti on functi ons properl y i f thi s i s the case. Lead fai l
detecti on does not functi on properl y i f thi s i s not the case. The
acqui si ti on PCB i s suspect. Swap the PCB wi th a worki ng pati ent
moni tor to veri fy the mal functi on.
3. Reattach the RA l eadwi re to the pati ent si mul ator.
Pace detect functions
1. Wi th the pati ent moni tor di spl ayi ng l eads I , I I , I I I , and V, set the
pati ent si mul ator to output a VP1 (ventri cul ar pacemaker si mul ati on
#1) waveform.
2. Enabl e the pacemaker detecti on functi on of the pati ent moni tor.
a. Sel ect ECG from the di spl ay mai n menu,
b. Sel ect DETECT PACE and set to PACE 2.
3. Veri fy the heart rate remai ns at approxi matel y 80 bpm.
4. Sel ect the VP2 output (ventri cul ar pacemaker si mul ati on #2) on the
5. Sel ect and press RELEARN.
6. The heart rate number may di sappear from the di spl ay for a few
seconds and return to the screen shortl y thereafter. Veri fy the heart
rate i s at approxi matel y 80 bpm. Veri fy the pacemaker spi kes di spl ay
at the same ampl i tude.
577A
7. Di sabl e the pacemaker detecti on functi on of the pati ent moni tor.
Veri fy the di spl ayed pacemaker spi kes have a di fferent ampl i tude
than i n the previ ous step.
8. Sel ect the AVS output (A/V sequenti al pacemaker si mul ati on) on the
10. Veri fy the di spl ayed pacemaker spi kes are at di fferent ampl i tudes.
12. Enabl e the pacemaker detecti on functi on of the pati ent moni tor once
agai n.
13. Set ECG GAI N to X2.
14. Veri fy a stabl e heart rate di spl ay of approxi matel y 80 bpm. Veri fy
the pacemaker spi kes are agai n at the same ampl i tude.
15. Di sabl e the pacemaker detecti on functi on of the pati ent moni tor.
Pace detect functions do not work properly
I f the pacemaker detecti on test resul ts are not correct, as descri bed
above, compl ete the fol l owi ng steps.
1. Veri fy the pati ent si mul ator functi ons correctl y by testi ng i t on a
worki ng pati ent moni tor.
2. I f the si mul ator i s functi oni ng correctl y, the acqui si ti on PCB i s
suspect. Swap a worki ng acqui si ti on PCB i nto the pati ent moni tor
and perform thi s test to veri fy correct operati on.
Invasive blood pressure functions (option)
The i nvasi ve bl ood pressure (BP) test procedure requi res the use of the
fol l owi ng pati ent si mul ator: Mul ti functi on Mi crosi mul ator (pn. MARQI I
or MARQI I I ). I f you need to use a di fferent pati ent si mul ator, adjust the
procedure steps/readi ngs accordi ngl y.
Setup BP
Connect the Bl ood Pressure output of the pati ent si mul ator to each
enabl ed BP pati ent connector on the si de panel of the pati ent moni tor.
Zero-reference enabled BP input
Properl y zero-reference each enabl ed BP i nput.
1. Set the pati ent si mul ator BP output to 0 mmHg
2. Press the ZERO ALL (FUNCTION) key on the pati ent moni tor.
Generate dynamic BP waveforms
1. Set the pati ent si mul ator BP output to a 120/80 Wave.
2. Setup the BP scal es on the pati ent moni tor to best match the
waveform output.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each enabl ed BP channel .
Verify dynamic BP results
Once the BP waveforms are setup as descri bed above veri fy the
fol l owi ng:
Waveforms are noi se-free, as shown i n the fi gure bel ow.
BP di spl ayed parameters are wi thi n tol erance as i ndi cated i n the
fol l owi ng l i st:
NOTE
These tests are desi gned for use wi th a Mul ti functi on
Mi crosi mul ator, pn. MARQI I or MARQI I I . Accuracy
speci fi cati ons of the pati ent si mul ator i n combi nati on wi th the
pati ent moni tor (2% or 1 mmHg, whi chever i s greater) i s how
the parameter val ues l i sted above, were deri ved. Use of any other
manufacturer pati ent si mul ator, and associ ated speci fi cati ons,
can potenti al l y change these test resul ts.
Generate static BP waveforms
1. Set the pati ent si mul ator BP output to 200 mmHg (240 mmHG
MARQI I or MARQI I I ), stati c pressure.
2. Veri fy the BP channel i s worki ng correctl y i f systol i c, di astol i c, and
mean pressure val ues for BP ar e di spl ayi ng parameter readi ngs
between 194 and 206 mmHg.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each enabl ed BP channel .
BP parameter: AR1
Systolic (mmHg): 116 124
Diastolic (mmHg): 78 82
519A
BP waveforms do not appear correctly on the display
1. I f the BP waveforms di spl ayed on the pati ent moni tor appear noi sy
or di storted (exampl e shown bel ow), test the Pati ent si mul ator and
si mul ator test cabl es and on a worki ng pati ent moni tor to determi ne
the source of the probl em.
2. I f the stati c pressure test resul ts were i naccurate, test the Pati ent
si mul ator and si mul ator test cabl es and on a worki ng pati ent
moni tor to determi ne the source of the probl em.
3. I f the pati ent si mul ator and associ ated test cabl es are determi ned to
be functi oni ng correctl y, repl ace the DAS FRU. See Chapter 7, Fi el d
repl aceabl e uni ts
BP waveforms do not appear on the display at all
1. I f the BP parameter l abel s, readi ngs and associ ated waveforms do
not di spl ay on the pati ent moni tor, veri fy the pati ent si mul ator and
associ ated test cabl es on a worki ng pati ent moni tor.
2. I nspect the BP si de panel connectors on the pati ent moni tor for bent
or broken pi ns. I f any pi ns are bent or broken, repl ace the DAS
assembl y.
3. I nspect the dual BP cabl e connectors on the pati ent moni tor for bent
or broken pi ns. I f any pi ns are bent or broken, repl ace the DAS
assembl y.
Respiration functions
Connect the Mul ti functi on Mi crosi mul ator (pn. MARQI I or MARQI I I )
and appropri ate pati ent cabl es to the ECG/RESP si de panel connector on
the pati ent moni tor.
1. Adjust the pati ent si mul ator to output a respi rati on waveform usi ng
the fol l owi ng setti ngs:
Rate BPM 30
Basel i ne I mpedance Ohms 750 (1000 Ohms MARQI I ),
R Ohms 2.0.
2. Enabl e the respi rati on functi on of the pati ent moni tor.
a. Sel ect MONI TOR SETUP from the mai n menu di spl ay on the
pati ent moni tor,
b. Sel ect PARAMETERS ON/OFF from the pati ent moni tor setup
menu.
c. Turn and push the Trim Knob control to scrol l to and sel ect RR
i n the parameters on/off pop-up wi ndow.
d. Toggl e and sel ect ON i n the RR l i ne of the parameters on/off pop-
up wi ndow.
520A
3. Veri fy the fol l owi ng:
Respi rati on rate i s di spl ayed and accurate.
Respi rati on waveform i s di spl ayed and noi se-free.
Markers appear i n the di spl ayed respi rati on waveform (see
fi gure bel ow). These i ndi cate the poi nts at whi ch the pati ent
moni tor senses i nspi rati on and expi rati on for determi nati on of
the respi rati on rate.
No respiration waveform or rate appear on the display
I f the respi rati on waveform or rate does not appear on the pati ent
moni tor di spl ay, perform the fol l owi ng steps to i sol ate the probl em.
1. Vary the basel i ne i mpedance on the pati ent si mul ator
2. Vary the R on the pati ent si mul ator.
3. Test the pati ent si mul ator and appropri ate pati ent cabl es on a
worki ng pati ent moni tor to determi ne the source of the probl em.
4. I f none of the previ ous recommendati ons corrects the probl em, the
acqui si ti on PCB i s suspect. Swap the PCB i nto a worki ng pati ent
moni tor to determi ne the source of the probl em and repl ace as
necessary.
Markers do not appear on respiration waveform; respiration rate is inaccurate
I f the markers on the respi rati on waveform do not appear on the di spl ay
or the respi rati on rate count i s i naccurate, try changi ng the respi rati on
sensi ti vi ty l evel on the pati ent moni tor. Use the Trim Knob control on
the pati ent moni tor to sel ect the fol l owi ng menu opti ons.
1. Scrol l to and sel ect RR (respi rati on parameter) from the pati ent
moni tor mai n menu,
2. Scrol l to and sel ect SENSI TI VI TY from the respi rati on parameter
menu, and
3. Scrol l to and sel ect a di fferent sensi ti vi ty percentage (%) from the
sensi ti vi ty menu
NOTE
Usual l y, a l ower respi rati on sensi ti vi ty % l evel recti fi es thi s
probl em.
582A
Respiration functions work properly on patient simulator but not on actual patient
Refer to the Operators Manual for detai l ed i nformati on regardi ng
pati ent preparati on rel ati ve to respi rati on moni tori ng functi ons.
Achi evi ng opti mum resul ts for respi rati on waveforms and accurate
respi rati on rate detecti on by the pati ent moni tor requi res proper
preparati on for ECG el ectrode pl acement on the pati ent. Fol l owi ng i s an
exampl e of a noi sy respi rati on waveform whi ch i s usual l y due to bad
pati ent preparati on.
NOTE
Wi th pati ents that exhi bi t excessi vel y hi gh basel i ne chest
i mpedance, proper respi rati on moni tori ng can be extremel y di ffi cul t,
i f not i mpossi bl e.
Noninvasive blood pressure functions
Perform the noni nvasi ve bl ood pressure (NBP) Checkout Procedure
found i n the Mai ntenance chapter. Thi s procedure determi nes whether
or not the NBP functi ons of the pati ent moni tor are worki ng as desi gned
or whether the pati ent moni tor requi res NBP cal i brati on.
I f, after performi ng the prescri bed checkout procedure, i t i s determi ned
that there are potenti al probl ems that NBP cal i brati on does not cure, try
the fol l owi ng:
1. I f cal i brati on i s unsuccessful and cannot be properl y performed,
there coul d be l eaks i n the pneumati c ci rcui t pl umbi ng. The fol l owi ng
steps assi st you i n determi ni ng thi s.
The NBP cuff and tubi ng i s the easi est area to i nspect for l eaks
and i s al so the most l i kel y area for fai l ure i n thi s regard. Cl osel y
i nspect these i tems for cracks or l eaks. Test the NBP cuff and
tubi ng on a worki ng pati ent moni tor to determi ne the source of
the probl em.
I f the NBP cuff and tubi ng are determi ned to be good after
testi ng them on a worki ng pati ent moni tor, the l eaks are
probabl y i nternal to the pati ent moni tor. Di sassembl e the pati ent
moni tor and check i nspect al l i nternal tubi ng and connecti ons i n
the pneumati c ci rcui t pl umbi ng.
2. I f no l eaks are found after performi ng the previ ous step, the NBP
pump assembl y i s suspect. Swap the NBP pump assembl y wi th one
from a worki ng pati ent moni tor and/or repl ace as necessary.
583A
NBP alarms occur continuously
I f the pati ent moni tor i s not confi gured properl y, a vari ety of NBP
probl ems may occur. To determi ne pati ent moni tor confi gurati on, rotate
then push the Trim Knob control to:
1. Scrol l to and sel ect CUSTOMI ZE MONI TOR from the mai n menu
of the pati ent moni tor,
2. Scrol l to and sel ect PATI ENT-MONI TOR TYPE from the customi ze
pati ent moni tor menu of the pati ent moni tor.
Veri fy the confi gured pati ent moni tor type matches the envi ronment i n
whi ch the pati ent moni tor i s bei ng used. I f i t i s set to a neonatal I CU
when the pati ent moni tor i s used for the adul t I CU appl i cati on or vi ce
versa, probl ems l i sted to the l eft may occur.
Checkout: Checkout procedures completion
Checkout procedures completion
Thi s compl etes al l tests associ ated wi th the checkout procedures.
1. Di schar ge the test pati ent admi tted dur i ng the ECG tests on
page 8-18.
2. Set al l test equi pment power swi tches to the off posi ti on.
3. Unpl ug the pati ent moni tor (or docki ng stati on) from AC power.
4. Remove al l test equi pment from the pati ent moni tor (or docki ng
stati on).
Repair log
Unit serial number:
Institution name:
Date Maintenance or repair Technician
2000966-387A Dash 3000/4000/5000 Patient Monitor A-1
A Appendix A Technical
specifications
Appendix A Technical specifications: Technical specifications
A-2 Dash 3000/4000/5000 Patient Monitor 2000966-387A
Technical specifications
Due to conti nual product i nnovati on, speci fi cati ons are subject to change
wi thout noti ce. The fol l owi ng speci fi cati ons are accurate as of the date of
thi s publ i cati on, and pertai n to the pati ent moni tor.
Performance specifications
Display
Controls
Size:
Dash 3000:
Dash 4000:
Dash 5000:
8.4-inch diagonal
10.4-inch diagonal
12.1- inch diagonal
Type:
Color: Active-Matrix Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
Resolution:
Dash 3000:
Dash 4000:
Dash 5000:
640 by 480 pixels
640 by 480 pixels
800 by 600 pixels
Number of traces: 6 (maximum)
Number of seconds/trace:
Dash 3000:
Dash 4000:
Dash 5000:
4.9 at 25 mm/sec
6.0 at 25 mm/sec
6.9 at 25 mm/sec
Sweep speed:
All waveforms 6.25, 12.5 or 25 mm/sec (with erase bar)
Waveform display options: Individual 6 waveforms, individual 3 waveforms, full,
and full grid modes
Parameter blocks displayed: Up to ten
Information window: Displays non-real-time information without obstructing
the display of real-time information
Display organization: Prioritized by parameter
Standard: Trim Knob control plus 5 hard keys: Power, NBP Go/
Stop (NBP Auto on Dash 5000), Zero All, Silence
Alarm/Admit, and Graph Go/Stop (Print on Dash
5000).
Optional remote control Trim Knob control and 18 active hard keys.
Alarms
ECG
Categories: Patient Status and System Status
Priorities: 4 levels Crisis, Warning, Advisory, and Message
Notification: Audible and visual
Setting: Default and individual
Silencing: 1 minute, current alarm only
Pause: 5 minutes (adult); 3 minutes (neonatal); 5, 15 minutes,
permanent (OR mode)
Volume: Default 70 dB measured at 1 meter
5 Leadwire cable: I, II, III, V, aVR, aVL, and aVF
10 Leadwire cable (12SL option): V2, V3, V4, V5 and V6
Leads analyzed simultaneously: I, II, III, and V (multi-lead mode)
Lead fail: Identifies failed lead
Alarms: User-selectable upper and lower heart rate limits
Input specifications:
Voltage range:
Signal width:
Heart rate range:
Accuracy:
Input impedance:
Common mode:
Differential:
Common mode rejection:
0.5 mV to 5 mV
40 ms to 120 ms (Q to S)
30 to 300 BPM
1% or 1 BPM, whichever is greater
>10 M at 50/60 Hz
>2.5 M from dc to 60 Hz
90dB minimum at 50 Hz or 60 Hz
Output specifications:
Heart rate averaging:
Frequency response:
Display:
Diagnostic Mode:
Monitoring Mode:
Moderate Mode:
Maximum Mode:
Impulse Response:
8 beats with a 2-second update rate of display
Response of non-permanent displays is limited by
resolution to 40 Hz (-3dB) @ 25 mm/s. Specified upper
frequency limits may vary by 2 Hz.
0.67(+0.4 dB) to 100 Hz (-3 dB)
For compliance with China National Standard: 1.0 Hz
(+0.4 dB) to 75 Hz (-3 dB)
0.67 (+0.4 dB) to 40 Hz (-3 dB)
0.67 (+0.4 dB) to 25 Hz (-3 dB)
5.0 Hz (-3 dB) to 25 Hz (-3 dB)
For an impulse of 3 mV applied for 100 ms:
Displacement following impulse: < 0.1 mV
Slope following impulse: < 0.3 mV/s
ST segment measurement:
Measurement point:
Measurement range:
Measurement accuracy:
Adjustable from 0 to 80 ms past the J-point
(default: 60 ms adult, 30 ms neonatal)
12.0 to +12.0 mm
10% or 0.5 mm, whichever is greater
Pacemaker detection/rejection:
Input voltage range:
Input pulse width:
Rise time:
Over/under shoot:
Baseline drift:
2 mV to 700 mV
0.1 ms to 2 ms
10 s to 100 s
2 mV (max)
<0.5 mV/hour with a 700-mV, 2-ms pacemaker pulse
applied
Invasive blood pressure (BP)
Noninvasive blood pressure (NBP)
Number of channels: 2
Transducer sites: Arterial (ART), femoral artery (FEM), pulmonary artery
(PA), central venous (CVP), right atrial (RA), left atrial
(LA), intracranial (ICP), and special (SP)
In neonatal mode: umbilical artery catheter (UAC) and
umbilical venous catheter (UVC)
Transducer requirements:
Excitation voltage:
Transducer output:
5.0 Vdc 0.1%
5 V/V/mmHg
Range:
Offset:
25 mmHg to 300 mmHg
150 mmHg
Frequency response:
Zero balance range:
Zero balance accuracy:
Zero balance drift:
Accuracy:
Alarms:
dc to 50 Hz
150 mmHg
1 mmHg
1 mmHg over 24 hours
2% or 1 mmHg, whichever is greater (exclusive of
transducer)
User-selectable upper and lower limits for systolic,
diastolic, and mean pressures
Measurement technique: Oscillometric
Displayed parameters: Systolic, diastolic, and mean pressures, time of last
measurement
Measurement modes: Manual, auto, and stat in adult and OR modes; manual
and auto in neonatal mode
NBP pressure range:
Systolic pressure range
Adult:
Pediatric:
Neonatal:
Diastolic pressure range
Adult:
Pediatric:
Neonatal:
Mean pressure range
Adult:
Pediatric:
Neonatal:
30 to 285 mmHg
30 to 235 mmHg
30 to 140 mmHg
10 to 220 mmHg
10 to 210 mmHg
10 to 110 mmHg
20 to 260 mmHg
20 to 220 mmHg
20 to 125 mmHg
Cuff pressure range:
Adult:
Pediatric:
Neonatal:
294 6 mmHg
250 5 mmHg
147 3 mmHg
Pressure accuracy:
Static:
Clinical:
2% or 3 mmHg, whichever is greater
5 mmHg average error
8 mmHg standard deviation
Heart rate detection: 30 to 200 beats per minute
Total cycle time: 20 to 40 seconds typical (dependent on heart rate and
motion artifact)
Automatic cycle times: 0 to 8 hours
Auto zero: Zero pressure reference prior to each cuff inflation
Tubing length:
Adult:
Neonatal:
12 feet
8 feet
Automatic cuff deflation: Cycle time exceeding 3 minutes (90 seconds neonatal),
power off, or cuff pressure exceeds 294 mmHg (6
mmHg) adult, 147 mmHg (3 mmHg) neonatal
Cuff sizes:
Disposable:
Reusable:
Large adult, adult, small adult, pediatric, small pediatric,
and infant
Thigh, large adult, adult, child, and infant
Alarms: User-selectable upper and lower limits for systolic,
diastolic, and mean pressures
Bispectral index (BIS)
GE pulse oximetry (SPO2)
Masimo SET SPO2 module
Technology Supports Aspect Medical BIS-x technology
Information Displayed BIS, SQI, SR and SEF, EEG waveform
BIS Range 0-100
Signal Quality Index (SQI) Range 0-100
Suppression Ratio (SR) Range 0-100%
Spectral Edge Frequency (SEF) Range 0-30
Alarms User selectable upper and lower BIS limits.
Parameters monitored: Arterial oxygen saturation (SpO2) and peripheral pulse
rate (PPR)
Measurement Range
Saturation:
Pulse Rate:
0 - 100% SpO
2
30 - 250 beats per minute
Accuracy
SpO2:
PPR:
Actual accuracy depends on probe. Please reference
manufacturers specifications.
2% (70 - 100% SpO2) 1 standard deviation
3% (50 - 69% SpO2) 1 standard deviation
3 beats per minute
Alarms: User-selectable upper and lower limits for SpO2 and
PPR.
Display Messages LOW QUALITY, PROBE IS OFF THE PATIENT, PROBE
OR MODULE MALFUNCTION, PULSE SEARCH
Measurement Range
Saturation:
Pulse Rate:
Perfusion:
30 to 100% SpO
2
25 to 240 beats per minute
0.02 to 20%
Accuracy
Displayed saturation data
Saturation, no motion:
Saturation, motion:
Pulse Rate, no motion:
Pulse Rate, motion:
Functional saturation
SpO
2
over the range 70 to 100%, below 69% is unspecified
2 digits for adults and pediatrics, 3 digits for neonates
SpO
2
3 digits for adults, pediatrics, and neonates
25 to 240 bpm, 3 bpm
Alarms: User-selectable upper and lower limits for SpO2 and PPR.
Patents
This device is covered under one or more of the following
U.S.A. patents: 5,758,644, 5,823,950, 6,011,986, 6,157,850,
6,263,222, 6,501,975 and other applicable patents listed at
http://www.masimo.com/patents.htm
Nellcor SPO2 module
Cardiac output (CO)
Display Messages PROBE IS OFF THE PATIENT, PROBE OR MODULE
MALFUNCTION, PULSE SEARCH
Measurement Range
Saturation:
Pulse Rate:
Perfusion:
1 to 100% SpO
2
20 to 250 beats per minute
0.03 to 20%
Accuracy
Displayed saturation data
Saturation, no interference:
Saturation, with interference:
Pulse Rate, no interference:
Pulse Rate, with interference:
Unspecified accuracy:
Actual accuracy depends on probe.
Functional saturation
SpO
2
2 digits for adults and pediatrics, 3 digits for neonates
SpO
2
3 digits for adults, pediatrics, and neonates
10 to 19 bpm, 251 to 300 bpm
Alarms: User-selectable upper and lower limits for SpO2 and PPR.
Patents 4621643, 4653498, 4700708, 4770179, 4802486,
4869254, 4928692, 4934372, 5078136, 5351685,
5421329, 5485847, 5533507, 5577500, 5803910,
5853364, 5865736, 6083172, Re35122.
Availability: Included in 7020 and 7025 software packages. Not
available in 7015 software package.
Probe type:
Catheter manufacturers:
Catheter sizes:
Abbott catheter sizes:
Arrow catheter sizes:
Baxter catheter sizes:
Ohmeda catheter sizes:
Other catheter sizes:
Injectate volume:
In-line or bath probe
Abbott, Arrow, Baxter, Ohmeda, or other
5.5F (75 cm), 7F (85 cm), 7.5F (110 cm), and
8F (110 cm)
5, 6, 7, or 7.5F
5, 6, 7, 7.5 or 8F
5, 7, or 7.5F
Cardiac coefficient entered manually
3, 5, or 10 cc
Parameters displayed:
Range:
Cardiac output:
Blood temperature:
Injectate temperature:
Accuracy:
Cardiac output:
Blood temperature:
Injectate temperature:
Frequency response:
Cardiac output, blood temperature, injectate
temperature, trial number
0.2 - 15 liters per minute
30 - 42C
0 - 30C
5% (liters of blood/min)
0.2C
0.3C
dc to 15 Hz 2 Hz
Respiration
Measurement technique: Impedance variation detection
Range:
Respiration rate:
Base impedance:
Detection sensitivity:
0 - 200 breaths per minute
100 - 1000 at 52.6 kHz excitation frequency
0.4 to 10 variation
Accuracy:
Respiration rate 1 BrPM
Waveform display bandwidth: 0.1 to 1.8 Hz (3 dB)
Alarms: User-selectable upper and lower respiration rate limits,
and user-selectable apnea limit
Temperature (TEMP)
Carbon dioxide (CO2)
Number of channels: 2
Probe type: YSI Series 400 or 700 thermistor (determined by input
cable)
Temperature range: 0C to 45C (32F to 113F)
Display resolution: 0.1C
Accuracy: 0.1C (25C to 45C) independent of sensor
Parameters displayed: T1, T2
Alarms: User-selectable upper and lower limits for T1, T2
Information displayed: Inspired and expired carbon dioxide concentrations in %,
mmHg or kPa, respiration rate, continuous CO2 waveform
Measurement technique: Non-dispersive infrared absorption, dual wavelength
ratiometric
Sensor type: Novametrix Medical Systems Capnostat III
Patient interface: Compatible with Novametrix Medical Systems
Capnogard monitoring product
Airway adaptors
Types:
Dead space/chamber volumes:
Adult reusable:
Adult disposable:
Neonatal:
Adult reusable (standard), adult disposable, neonatal
<5 cc
<5 cc
<0.5 cc
CO2 measurement specifications:
Measurement range:
Pi CO2/Fi CO2:
Pe CO2/Fe CO2:
RR:
Accuracy:
Display update interval:
CO2 waveform sweep speed:
CO2 averaging:
CO2 measurement stability:
Resolution:
Noise:
60 Hz interference:
Step response time:
Adult:
Neonatal
Interference:
N2O gas:
O2 gas:
Barometric pressure:
Water vapor:
Anesthetic agent:
Airway adapter variability:
Warm-up time:
Calibration:
Factory settings:
Verification:
0 to 100 mmHg/0 to 13%
0 to 100 mmHg/0 to 13%
0 to 120 breaths/min
5% of reading or 2 mmHg, whichever is greater
2 sec
Selectable 6.25, 12.5, or 25 mm/sec
Selectable from single breath, 10 sec, or 20 sec
Accuracy maintained over 8 hours
1 mmHg
2% of reading or 0.5 mmHg (maximum), whichever is
greater
<0.5 mmHg at 38 mmHg
<60 ms (10-90%)
<50 ms (10-90%)
5% of reading or 2 mmHg (maximum), whichever is
greater, with N2O compensation enabled
5% of reading or 2 mmHg (maximum), whichever is
greater, with O2 compensation enabled
2 mmHg (maximum) from 500 to 800 mmHg
1.5% of reading or 0.5 mmHg (maximum),
whichever is greater
0.5 mmHg (maximum) for concentration of no more
than 5% of halogenated agents
3% of reading or 1.5 mmHg (maximum), whichever
is greater, with same or different adapter; not applicable
after adapter zero
Less than 15 seconds to initial CO2 indication, full
specification within 120 seconds; waveform immediate
upon power up
Factory calibration settings stored in nonvolatile
memory within the sensor; 15 second adaptor
calibration when switching airway types
Zero and span performance check with on-cable verifier
Respiration rate specifications:
Range (for 5% step size):
Accuracy:
Resolution:
0-120 breaths per minute
1 breath per minute
1 breath per minute
Barometric pressure sensor
specifications:
Range:
Accuracy:
530 to 785 mmHg (70.7 to 104.7 kPa)
25 mmHg
Alarms: User-selectable upper and lower limits for CO2 and RR.
Analog output
Defibrillator synchronization pulse
ECG:
Gain:
DC offset:
Noise:
Frequency response:
Time delay:
1 V/mV 10%
100 mV (max)
<5 mVp-p (0-300 Hz)
In the ECG section, refer to the Output
specifications: on page -3.
40 ms monitoring filter, 35 ms diagnostic filter
Blood pressure:
Gain:
DC offset:
Noise:
Frequency response:
Time delay:
10 mV/mmHg 2%
20 mV (max)
<5 mVp-p (0-300 Hz)
dc to 50 Hz +2/0 Hz
40 Hz filter, 37 ms
Marker out:
Time delay:
Amplitude (selectable in Service
menu):
+5 V selection:
+12 V selection:
Pulse width:
Output impedance:
Current limit:
35 ms (maximum), R-wave peak to leading edge of
pulse.
3.5 V (min) at 1 mA sourcing; 0.5 V (max) at 5 mA
sinking.
11.0 V (min) at 1 mA sourcing; 0.75 V (max) at 5 mA
sinking.
10 ms 10% or 100 ms 10% (selectable in Service
menu).
50 nominal
15 mA nominal, both sourcing and sinking.
Marker in:
Input threshold:
Input hysteresis:
Maximum input voltage:
Input impedance:
Pulse width:
V
IH
= 2.5 V (min); V
IL
= 1.5 V (max)
650 mV typical
30 V (with respect to ground on pin 3)
10 k (min) for -25 V < VIN < 25 V
1.0 ms (min), VIN > 2.5 V
Battery
Paper recorder
Battery type: Exchangeable Lithium-Ion
Number of batteries: up to 2
Battery weight: 0.36 kg (0.8 lbs) each
Voltage: 11.1 V (nominal)
Capacity: 3520 mAh
Charge time: Less than 4 hours each
Run time:
one battery:
two batteries:
2.5 hours
5.0 hours
NOTE
The run ti me of the battery i s
dependant upon the fol l owi ng i tems:
The battery functi ons at 100%
desi gn capaci ty and ful l charge
capaci ty.
The moni tored parameters are
ECG, BP1, BP2, Temp., and SpO
2
.
Battery life: 500 cycles to 50% capacity
Storage temperature: -20C to 60C (-4F to 140F)
Method: Thermal dot array
Horizontal resolution: 480 dots/in at 25 mm/sec
Vertical resolution: 200 dots/in
Number of waveform channels: 4
Paper width: 50 mm (1.97 in)
Paper length: 30 m (100 ft)
Paper speed: 0.1, 0.5, 1, 5, 10, 12.5, 25, and 50 mm/sec ( 2%)
Wireless LAN
Environmental specifications
802.11 802.11b
Transmission technique: Frequency hopping spread spectrum Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum
Frequency: Country dependent, specific settings received from access point. Within 2400 to 2500 MHZ range.
Radio data rates: 1 and 2 Mbps 1, 2, 5.5 and 11 Mbps
Radio output power: 100 mW (including antenna gain) 100 mW (including antenna gain)
Modulation: Binary GFSK BPSK (1 Mbps), QPSK (2 Mbps), CCK (5.5
and 11 Mbps)
Applicable standards: US: FCC Part 15 Class B
Europe: ETS 300 328 and ETS 300 826
US: FCC Part 15 Class B
Europe: ETS 300 328
Japan: RCR STD-33
NOTE
The system may not meet i ts performance speci fi cati ons i f stored or
used outsi de the manufacturers speci fi ed temperature and
humi di ty range.
Power requirements:
100-120 VAC
200-240 VAC
50/60 Hz 2.0A
50/60 Hz 1.0A
Power consumption: 75 watts (fully loaded)
Cooling: Convection
Heat dissipation: 240 Btu/hr (max)
Battery operation time:
General: Battery age will affect operating time.
Operating conditions:
Ambient temperature:
While charging batteries:
With Nellcor
Capnostat III sensor:
Relative humidity:
Altitude:
0 to 40C (32 to 104F)
0 to 35C (32 to 95F)
0 to 35C (32 to 95F)
10 to 40 C (50 to 104F)
5 to 95% at 40C
-273.10 m to 2,942.84 m (-896 ft to 9655 ft)
Storage conditions (Do not
exceed):
Maximum:
Minimum:
CO2 Sensor:
Batteries:
70C (158F) at 95% relative humidity
40C (40F) at 15% relative humidity
30 to 65C (22 to 149F)
20 to 60C (4 to 140F)
Equipment Type: Portable per EN 60601-1
Physical specifications
Certification
Safety
Height:
Dash 3000
Dash 4000
Dash 5000
26 cm (10.25 inches)
27.4 cm (10.8 inches)
28.7 cm (11.3 inches)
Width:
Dash 3000
Dash 4000
Dash 5000
28 cm (11.0 inches)
29.3 cm (11.5 inches)
30.7 cm (12.2 inches)
Depth:
Dash 3000
Dash 4000
Dash 5000
20 cm (8 inches)
24.3 cm (9.6 inches)
23.9 cm (9.4 inches)
Weight (without batteries)
Dash 3000
Dash 4000
Dash 5000
5.5 kg (12 lbs) with all options
5.5 kg (12.2 lbs) with all options
6.4 kg (14 lbs) with all options
UL 60601-1
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 601.1
IEC/EN 60601-1
IEC/EN 60601-1-2
IEC/EN 60601-1-4
IEC/EN 60601-2-27
IEC/EN 60601-2-30
IEC/EN 60601-2-34
IEC/EN 60601-2-49
IEC/EN 12470-4
IEC/EN 865
JJG 760-2003
YY 91079-1999
CE marked to the Medical Devices Directive 93/42/EEC
Radio and Telecommunication Terminal Equipment Directive
FCC compliance information statement
Thi s devi ce compl i es wi th Part 15 of the FCC Rul es and wi th RSS-210 of
I ndustry Canada.
Operati on i s subject to the fol l owi ng two condi ti ons:
1. Thi s devi ce may not cause harmful i nterference, and
2. Thi s devi ce must accept any i nterference recei ved, i ncl udi ng
i nterference that may cause undesi red operati on.
WARNING
Changes or modi fi cati ons not expressl y approved by the
party responsi bl e for compl i ance coul d voi d the users
authori ty to operate the equi pment.
2000966-387A Dash 3000/4000/5000 Patient Monitor B-1
B Appendix B
Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC)
Appendix B Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC): Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
B-2 Dash 3000/4000/5000 Patient Monitor 2000966-387A
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
Changes or modi fi cati ons to thi s system not expressl y approved by GE
can cause EMC i ssues wi th thi s or other equi pment. Thi s system i s
desi gned and tested to compl y wi th appl i cabl e regul ati on regardi ng EMC
and must be i nstal l ed and put i nto servi ce accordi ng to the EMC
i nformati on stated i n thi s suppl ement.
WARNINGS
Use of portabl e phones or other radi o frequency (RF)
emi tti ng equi pment near the system may cause
unexpected or adverse operati on.
The equi pment or system shoul d not be used adjacent to,
or stacked wi th, other equi pment. I f adjacent or stacked
use i s necessary, the equi pment or system shoul d be
tested to veri fy normal operati on i n the confi gurati on i n
whi ch i t i s bei ng used.
Guidance and Manufacturers Declaration Electromagnetic
Emissions
The Dash 3000/4000/5000 Pati ent Moni tor i s i ntended for use i n the
el ectromagneti c envi ronment speci fi ed bel ow. I t i s the responsi bi l i ty of
the customer or user to assure that the Dash 3000/4000/5000 Pati ent
Moni tor i s used i n such an envi ronment.
Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment guidance
RF Emissions
EN 55011
Group 1 The equipment uses RF energy only for its internal function. Therefore, its RF
emissions are very low and are not likely to cause any interference in nearby
electronic equipment.
RF Emissions
EN 55011
Class A
Harmonic Emissions
EN 61000-3-2
Class A The equipment is suitable for use in all establishments other than domestic and
those directly connected to the public low-voltage power supply network that
supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.
Voltage Fluctuations/
Flicker Emissions
EN 61000-3-3
Complies
Guidance and manufacturers declaration electromagnetic
immunity
NOTE:
U
t
i s the AC mai ns vol tage pri or to appl i cati on of the test l evel .
Immunity test EN 60601 test level Compliance level Electromagnetic environment guidance
Electrostatic
Discharge (ESD)
EN 61000-4-2
6 kV contact 6 kV contact Floors should be wood, concrete or ceramic tile. If
floors are covered with synthetic material, the relative
humidity should be at least 30%.
8 kV air 8 kV air
Electrical Fast
Transient/Burst
EN 61000-4-4
2 kV for power supply lines 2 kV for power supply
lines
Mains power should be that of a typical commercial
or hospital environment.
1 kV for input/output lines 1 kV for input/output
lines
Surge
EN 61000-4-5
1 kV differential mode 1 kV differential mode Mains power should be that of a typical commercial
or hospital environment.
2 kV common mode 2 kV common mode
<5% U
t
(>95% dip in U
t
)
for 0.5 cycles
<5% U
t
(>95% dip in U
t
)
for 0.5 cycles
Voltage dips, short
interruptions and
voltage variations
on power supply
input lines
EN 61000-4-11
<40% U
t
(>60% dip in U
t
)
for 5 cycles
<40% U
t
(>60% dip in
U
t
) for 5 cycles
Mains power should be that of a typical commercial
or hospital environment. If the user of the equipment
requires continued operation during power mains
interruptions, it is recommended that the equipment
be powered from an uninterruptible power supply or
a battery.
<70% U
t
(>30% dip in U
t
)
for 25 cycles
<70% U
t
(>30% dip in
U
t
) for 25 cycles
<5% U
t
(>95% dip in U
t
)
for 5 s
<5% U
t
(>95% dip in U
t
)
for 5 s
Power Frequency
(50/60 Hz)
Magnetic Field
EN 61000-4-8
3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency magnetic fields should be at levels
characteristic of a typical location in a typical
commercial or hospital environment.
Guidance and Manufacturers Declaration Electromagnetic
Immunity
Immunity test EN 60601 test level Compliance level Electromagnetic environment guidance
Portable and mobile RF communications equipment should not
be used closer to any part of the equipment, including cables,
than the recommended separation distance calculated from the
equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter.
Recommended separation distance
Conducted RF
EN 61000-4-6
3 Vrms
150 KHz to 80 MHz
3 V rms
d = 1.2
Radiated RF
EN 61000-4-3
3 V/m
80 MHz to 2.5 GHz
3 V/m
d = 1.2 80 MHz to 800 MHz
d = 2.3 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter
in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer, and d is
the recommended separation distance in meters (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as determined by an
electromagnetic site survey
a
, should be less than the
compliance level in each frequency range
b
.
Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment marked with
the following symbol:
Note 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
Note 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by reflection from structures, objects,
and people.
a
Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land mobile radio,
AM and FM radio broadcast, and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the
electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the
measured field strength in the location in which the equipment is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above,
the equipment should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures
may be necessary, such as re-orienting or relocating the equipment.
b
Over the frequency range 150 KHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 3 V/m.
P
P
P
Recommended separation distances
The tabl e bel ow provi des the recommended separati on di stances (i n
meters) between portabl e and mobi l e RF communi cati ons equi pment and
the Dash 3000/4000/5000 Pati ent Moni tor.
el ectromagneti c envi ronment on whi ch radi ated RF di sturbances are
control l ed. The customer or the user of the Dash 3000/4000/5000 Pati ent
Moni tor can hel p prevent el ectromagneti c i nterference by mai ntai ni ng a
mi ni mum di stance between portabl e and mobi l e RF communi cati ons
equi pment (transmi tters) and the Dash 3000/4000/5000 Pati ent Moni tor
as recommended bel ow, accordi ng to the maxi mum output power of the
communi cati ons equi pment.
For transmi tters rated at a maxi mum output power not l i sted above, the
recommended separati on di stance [d] i n meters (m) can be esti mated
usi ng the equi tati on appl i cabl e to the frequency of the transmi tter,
where P i s the maxi mum output power rati ng of the transmi tter i n watts
(W) accordi ng to the transmi tter manufacturer.
NOTE:
These gui del i nes may not appl y i n al l i nstances. El ectromagneti c
propagati on i s affected by absorpti on and refl ecti on from structures,
objects and peopl e.
Separation distance in meters (m) according to frequency of transmitter
Rated maximum output
power of transmitter in
Watts
150 kHz to 80 MHz
a
d = 1.2
80 MHz to 800 MHz
a
d = 1.2
800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
a
d = 2.3
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73
1 1.2 1.2 2.3
10 3.8 3.8 7.3
100 12 12 23
a
At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.
P P P
Compliant cables and accessories
WARNING
The use of accessori es, transducers and cabl es other than
those speci fi ed may r esul t i n i ncr eased emi ssi ons or
decreased i mmuni ty performance of the equi pment or
system.
The tabl e bel ow l i sts cabl es, transducers, and other appl i cabl e
accessori es wi th whi ch GE EMC compl i ance.
NOTE:
Any suppl i ed accessori es that do not affect EMC compl i ance are not
i ncl uded.
Category Description Maximum length
ECG cables
Multi-Link 12-Ld ECG Standard Cable 3.6 m / 12 ft
Multi-Link 5-Ld ECG Standard Cable 6 m / 20 ft
Multi-Link 3-Ld ECG Neonatal Cable 3.6 m / 12 ft
Multi-Link 3-Ld ECG Cable w/Grabber 3.6 m / 12 ft
Multi-Link 5-Ld ECG ESU 3.6 m / 12 ft
Multi-Link, 3/5-Ld ECG Cable 3.6 m / 12 ft
Multi-Link 3-Ld Neonatal ECG Cable 3.6 m / 12 ft
Multi-Link 3-Ld ECG Cable w/Grabber 3.6 m / 12 ft
Multi-Link 6-Ld ECG Cable 3.6 m / 12 ft
Multi-Link 12 SL ECG Cable 3.6 m / 12 ft
Multi-Link 3/5/6 Adapter N/A
Multi-Link to 300-Series 3-Ld Trunk Cable 3 m / 10 ft
Multi-Link to 300-Series 5-Ld Trunk Cable 3 m / 10 ft
ECG Multi-Link lead wires
Multi-Link lead wire Set-Group, 5-Ld, Grabber 130 cm / 51 in
Multi-Link lead wire Set-Group, 3-Ld, Grabber 130 cm / 51 in
Multi-Link lead wire set, 5-Ld, Grabber 130 cm / 51 in
Multi-Link lead wire set, 5-Ld, Grabber V2-V6 130 cm / 51 in
Multi-Link lead wire set, 3-Ld, MiniGrab AHA Ld I 74 cm / 29 in
Multi-Link lead wire set, 3-Ld, MiniGrab IEC Ld I 74 cm / 29 in
Multi-Link lead wire set, 3-Ld, Adult Grabber AHA Ld II 74 cm / 29 in
Multi-Link lead wire set, 3-Ld, Adult Grabber IEC Ld II 74 cm / 29 in
Multi-Link Ldwr Set-Group, 5-Ld, Snap 130 cm / 51 in
Multi-Link Ldwr Set-Group, 3-Ld, Snap 130 cm / 51 in
Multi-Link Ldwr Set, Mini-Clip/DIN, Neonatal 60 cm / 24 in
Multi-Link Ldwr Set, 5-Ld, Snap 130 cm / 51 in
Multi-Link Ldwr Set, Radiotranslucent Grabber 1.6 m / 60 in
Multi-Link Ldwr Set, 6-Ld, Snap 130 cm / 51 in
Multi-Link Ldwr Set, Individual, Grabber 130 cm / 51 in
Multi-Link Ldwr Set, Individual, Snap 130 cm / 51 in
Multi-Link Ldwr Set, Individual, Grabber, V2-V6 130 cm / 51 in
300-Series 3-Ld Set w/clips 75 cm / 30 in
300-Series 3-Ld Set w/clips 1.5 m / 60 in
300-Series 3-Ld Set w/snaps 75 cm / 30 in
300-Series 5-Ld Set w/clips 125 cm / 49 in
300-Series 5-Ld Set w/clips 1.5 m / 60 in
300-Series 5-Ld Set w/snaps 125 cm / 49 in
300-Series replacement clip lead 125 cm / 49 in
300-Series replacement clip lead 1.5 m / 60 in
300-Series replacement clip lead 75 cm / 30 in
300-Series replacement snap lead 125 cm / 49 in
Invasive BP cables and transducers
Utah Transducer Adapter Cable 3.6 m / 12 ft
Spectramed Transducer Adapter Cable 3.6 m / 12 ft
Dual BP adapter 30 cm / 12 in
Utah Transducer Adapter Cable 3.6 m / 12 ft
Abbott Transpac-III Adapter Cable 3.6 m / 12 ft
Abbott Transpac-IV Adapter Cable 3.6 m / 12 ft
Edwards Truwave Adapter Cable 3.6 m / 12 ft
Spectramed Transducer Adapter Cable 3.6 m / 12 ft
Utah Disposable Transducers (DPT, DP2, DP3) N/A
Spectramed Transducers (TC-MQ) N/A
Abbott Transpac-III Transducers N/A
Abbott Transpac-IV Transducers N/A
Edwards Truwave Transducers (PX) N/A
Cardiac output cables and probes
Cardiac Output Cable 3.6 m / 12 ft
Cardiac Output Probe 2.4 m / 8 ft
Cardiac Output Cable 3.6 m / 12 ft
Temperature cables and probes
Dual Temp Cable 20 cm / 8 in
Temp Probe Interconnect Cable 3.6 m / 12 ft
Dual Temp Cable 20 cm / 8 in
Pulse oximetry cables and sensors
Nellcor RECAL Interface Cable 3.6 m / 12 ft
Masimo SET Interface Cable 3.6 m / 12 ft
Masimo SET Interface Cable 3.6 m / 12 ft
Nellcor RCAL Interface Cable 3.6 m / 12 ft
Nellcor OxiMax Interface Cable 3 m / 10 ft
Nellcor OxiMax Interface Cable 1.2 m / 10 ft
Masimo Finger Sensor, Pediatric N/A
Masimo Finger Sensor, Adult N/A
Masimo Sensor Finger Probe N/A
Durasensor DS-100A, Adult N/A
CO2 cable
CO2 Sensor Cable 2.4 m / 8 ft
Accessories
Power Cord 1.8 m / 6 ft
Power Cord 1.8 m / 6 ft
Battery Lithium-Ion N/A
RJ45 series Category 5 cable N/A
DASH Port 2 N/A
CapnoFlex LF CO2 Module N/A
UNITY Network ID to Dash Cable 1.5 m / 5 ft
Remote Control N/A
UNITY Network ID N/A
AUX Adapter N/A
RAC 2A N/A
SAM Module N/A
ICG-BIOz Hemodynamics Module N/A
ICG Patient Cable 4.8 m / 15 ft
Dash Responder N/A
15 inch Medical Grade Flat Panel Display N/A
Digital Video Cable 1.8 m / 6 ft
Durasensor Adult DS-100A Individual Probe
World Headquarters
GE Medical Systems
Information Technologies, Inc.
8200 West Tower Avenue
Milwaukee, WI 53223 USA
Tel:+ 1 414 355 5000
1 800 558 5120 (US only)
Fax:+ 1 414 355 3790
European Representative
GE Medical Systems
Information Technologies GmbH
Munzinger Strae 3-5
D-79111 Freiburg
Germany
Tel: + 49 761 45 43 - 0
Fax: + 49 761 45 43 - 233
Asia Headquarters
GE Medical Systems
Information Technologies Asia; GE (China) Co., Ltd.
24th Floor, Shanghai MAXDO Center,
8 Xing Yi Road, Hong Qiao Development Zone
Shanghai 200336, P.R. China
Tel: + 86 21 5257 4650
Fax: + 86 21 5208 2008
GE Medical Systems Information Technologies, a General Electric Company, going to market as
GE Healthcare
www.gehealthcare.com

2000966-387a Dash 3 - 4 - 5K Versao 6.5 Service

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

2000966-387a Dash 3 - 4 - 5K Versao 6.5 Service

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

GE Healthcare

, a remote di spl ay, and auxi l i ary devi ces.

XP or 2000 operating system

Вам также может понравиться